JP6749044B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which the winning probability of the jackpot is changed from a low probability to a high probability in a gaming state after the jackpot game is over, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball is won at the starting opening. Then, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery process is performed in which a big hit or the like is lottered. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time on a predetermined display. Then, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the lottery result is displayed. If the lottery result is a big hit, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing that the big hit is won, and then a big hit game in which many prize balls are paid out to the player is performed.

Also, after such a jackpot game is played, it may be controlled to a game state advantageous to the player. In this advantageous game state, the opening extension function that increases the winning frequency of the game ball to the starting opening is activated, and the symbol fluctuation is repeated in a shorter time than in the normal game state, so that a lottery for the big hit The processing can be digested at a good tempo.

JP, 2010-187791, A

However, according to the conventional gaming machine, although the number of variations of symbols per unit time is advantageous gaming state is advantageous to the player at a point which is to be increased, or the probability lottery, Xing flavor There was a risk of a drop.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest.

A gate member which is provided in a predetermined game area, through which a game ball can pass, and a starting port through which the game ball can be switched between an easy state and a difficult state by operating a movable member, and the starting port. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the winning of the game ball to, the production means for performing a predetermined production, the accessory structure operable from the standby position to the production position, and the lottery result by the lottery means. After the big hit game is executed, the effect control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game with the predetermined effect in the effect means, the jackpot game executing means capable of executing the jackpot game based on the lottery result, and the jackpot game are executed, Advantageous game state control means capable of controlling the advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the fact that the player can understand that the advantageous game state is controlled during the advantageous game state External advantageous state notification means for controlling to an external advantageous state, and in the advantageous game state, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member, the movable member is controlled so that the game ball can easily win the starting opening. Executable movable control means, and, the execution time of the variation display game performed by the effect control means is determined from the variation pattern table referred to according to the lottery result, the variation pattern table, It is configured so that it can be changed depending on the number of fluctuations since the control of the advantageous game state is started, and high-speed fluctuation is performed up to a predetermined number of times after being controlled to the advantageous game state so that the lottery can be exhausted at high speed. The pattern table is set so as to be referred to, and the high-speed fluctuation pattern table is set up to the specified number of times. The derivation of the lottery result is set to be relatively long compared to the case where the high speed variation pattern table is referenced in the advantageous game state after the pattern table is referenced the prescribed number of times. The change pattern table is changed as described above, and after the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is finished, the advantageous game is controlled to the normal game state and immediately before the normal game state is controlled. The variation pattern table referred to in the state is the variation pattern table that can be referred to when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous game state is a lottery result in which the jackpot game is not executed. Until derivation The specific variation pattern table that tends to take the longest time is referred to, and while the lottery is quickly digested by the high-speed lottery digestion means, a series of display effects can be executed over a period in which a plurality of lottery is digested. The external advantageous state indicated by the external advantageous state informing means having a number-of-times production means is terminated when the high-speed lottery digestion means completes the high-speed digestion, and then a predetermined number of the lottery is digested. And, while deriving the lottery result performed by the high-speed lottery digestion means, the accessory structure is enabled, and when the jackpot game is executed, the accessory structure is produced. Notifying the player that the jackpot game will be executed by operating it in the position, and in the case where the jackpot game is not executed, the accessory structure is from the standby position to the effect position. Although it does not work, it is possible to execute an effect that is expected to be notified that it is the lottery result that the jackpot game is executed by the accessory structure , and the high-speed fluctuation pattern table is referred to, When moving the accessory structure to the effect position to inform the player that the jackpot game will be executed, in parallel, a design variation effect that effects whether the combination of decorative symbols is a specific combination or not. A gaming machine characterized by not executing .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It is a perspective view showing a state where the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a structure for attaching and detaching the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the site|part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front after disassembling, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the rear after being disassembled. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame showing the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism is seen from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 56. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, and (D). FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen after. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of a back cover in the body frame, and (B) is a back perspective view of the back cover in the body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was seen after. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 taken in a vertical direction. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like, as viewed from the front. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 110. It is a partial sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and is a view in which a ball matrix can be confirmed in front of the second special winning opening. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from the back diagonally. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interception board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal sound signal interruption board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the main processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a starting mouth winning process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding one example of the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure about an example of processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing performed every 16ms in sub main processing. It is a front view of a game board showing an example of effects in the probability variation short game state. It is a front view of a game board showing an example of effects in the probability variation short game state. It is an example of a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko machine as seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board forming the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable and the front side is open. A box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and in which a game ball as a game medium is hit, a front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the drawing, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 is projected to the front side below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. The player cannot insert his or her hand into the game area 1100 to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and accessory objects. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 are provided with four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13, respectively. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially vertically centered on the left and right ends. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of vertically extending grooves are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 becomes a finger rest so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 that extends to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 that extends from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in bilaterally symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw is passed through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, whereby the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower metal supporting member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projecting piece. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14), and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. In addition, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-like support protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support protrusion piece 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support metal member 644 (see FIG. 70 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal member 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support fitting 20, and the supporting projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of the support hook hole 20e so as to close the inclined hole portion of the supporting hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the supporting hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a. A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and it is in a state of contact. In the normal axial support state, which is the same), the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, which are located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the stopper 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d by exerting the acting force F in the direction of slipping out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side is maintained. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise in the drawing) away from the support protrusion piece 20b, one side of the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting protrusion 20b.

Even if the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip portion of the lock member 27 is directed toward the outside of the support projection piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, and The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting protrusion 20b. I have confirmed.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support fitting is provided in a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivot support fitting 644 (see FIG. 67). It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during a normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Then, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails on the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily drive the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed on existing island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, the wall thickness can be formed thin while maintaining strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed at the same time as the main body frame 3 can be mounted.

In addition, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 forms the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is tightly attached and fixed, and the coupling member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular frame shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back.

As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating through the dish unit 300 and a door. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. The frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, a handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and a firing cover 191 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. And a door frame base board 194 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192 and the like (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in rear view (on the side of pivot support)) and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base. A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and wiring 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. 28). Wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the above).

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral controller provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240 and 280, the decorative units 430 and 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a and 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control section 4140, and the like is on the right side (spindle support) in the rear view of the door frame base board 194. Although it will be described later in detail, after being bundled together at the position of (side), the main holding relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extend rearward. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. This door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580 are mounted and fixed. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball mounting opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion in a front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and has a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 formed and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base board 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding rearward to mount the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the glass unit 590. Glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front face can abut, and two locking member attachments for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 to rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190. The part 110b is further provided.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with appropriate mounting positions for the mounting boss 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and the mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) for mounting the side speaker cover 338. Are formed respectively.

In addition, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent the crime and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view from a center of the game area 1100 by a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1). It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of 0.5 m) so that the sound can be delivered to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible, and the left and right sides are arranged. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output sounds having a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is clamped by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby a door frame is formed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment boss 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, and the rear side of the rear side has a vertical direction. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three upper and lower in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is turned toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be housed in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined binding band in the upper and lower holding holes 197a with wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof. The wiring 196 can be held by inserting the wiring 198 and tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. As a result, it is pushed forward and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side ends. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base board cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is rotatably supported on the rear surface and part of the wiring 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded or unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened or closed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.).

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and high-rigidity synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wiring 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the vertical direction It is possible to prevent the blurring in the direction, and it is possible to surely fold the wiring 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a defect.

Furthermore, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. When the wiring 196 hangs down, it is caught by another member and is disconnected. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and a main control board 4100, a peripheral control section 4140, a payout control board 4110, etc. as main body side electric devices, and the door side. The wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, etc. as electric devices is defective. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the noise as much as possible.

In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wiring, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. A part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates. The wiring 196 does not slide as in the case of ), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Furthermore, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened/closed by being guided, the main body frame 3 in which the strength/rigidity of the side of the door frame 5 on which the pivot is supported is increased. The door frame 5 can be used as the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against fraud.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the wiring by the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wire holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wire 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. A pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axial center of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, so wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is performed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acts on the wiring 196, etc. to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back along the wiring holding member 197 at the tip end side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a defect from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be held to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 having the large game board 4 which can attract the player's attention strongly can be provided. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined in a similar manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface in the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion 160 that is bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and is vertically extended. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is provided with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 that are bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 described later is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Furthermore, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side projecting piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. (See 112), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, prevent only the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, and enhance the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the drawing, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and is arcuately formed along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 on the upper side thereof. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention rear projection 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projections 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof. In addition, the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (axial support side) in a rear view is extended to the rear longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right outside the crime prevention front projection 184 are provided. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open side thereof is forward. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

The security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface of the security cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the invasion of the tool, and thus fraudulent acts. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b that extends in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locks the locking projection piece 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outside is formed in a linear shape along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and on which a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted, and a side inner on the lower side Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and lower right side decorative substrate 216 which are arranged below the substantially center of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right side upper decoration substrate cover 218 that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decoration substrate 214, and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216. The lower right side decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the lens 210 and the side outer cover 202.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged at a front side of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between an upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are the side inner lenses. An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the drawing, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

The side lens 210 also includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can diffuse light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down of the pachinko machine 1 widely. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion projecting forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. This side inner lens 212 can irregularly refract and diffusely reflect light by a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and in cooperation with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side, the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glitter. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

Similarly to the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, which is a noise for other pachinko machines. It's becoming difficult. As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, the light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of a light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit.

As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrical to the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the lower side decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large And a frame-shaped upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246 that is fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from the rear side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 and are fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a from the rear side. A rear side of the inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the inner decoration member 251. And a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

The left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed on the lower side from substantially the vertical center of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) are mounted. A left side upper decoration board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side which covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. And a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in an upper right portion in front view, and a transparent member attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). In addition, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) are used. Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b with the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 penetrating in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251, and light is diffused and refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decoration board 254 and the left side lower decoration board 256 are white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend in the up-down direction along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. In other words, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other.

In addition, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in a front view which is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer periphery of the game window 101 to the upper outer periphery thereof. It is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side decorative frame 244 is arranged between the large window frames 244a and two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small oval-shaped window frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

The side decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side and a rear concave portion between the peripheral lens portions 250a are formed. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the emission lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and also in the width direction thereof so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251a formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 has a diffusing portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend is arranged on the front side. The slits 251a of the decorative member 251 intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slits 251a.

The side inner lens 252 is configured such that the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but light is diffused and refracted by a plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion parts 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without diffusing or refracting.

The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left-side decorative unit 240 are provided with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the radiating lens section 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

Like the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper rear side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 from being broken and an unauthorized tool being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for the other pachinko machines to make noise.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 including the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a forming the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left inner decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens part 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens part 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens part 250a and is emitted to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions displaced from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251a and intersects by the diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades, extending in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 on the center side. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular center frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the center frame 281a to the left and right slenderly and becomes narrower toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the center frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 that is arranged on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on its surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282; A light blocking member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light blocking member 287 and corresponding to the inside of the tubular portion 287a of the light blocking member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units that are arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. Of the upper side decorative substrate 290, a substrate cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear portion of the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 that is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 has a large amount of light-transmitting property. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281, and has a notch portion 295a whose rear end side is open at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. ..

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 glitters by light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending belt-shaped lenses arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the axial center of the through hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the belt-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted, so that the rear surface is clear. Is not visible to.

Further, the upper central decoration substrate 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 is adapted to allow the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs 290a to emit light.

[Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. A plate-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to approximately the center of the front face and is open on the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (shaft support side) greatly. When viewed, the upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with and cover the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is provided.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower side of the plate attachment base 320, which is a plate-like substrate attachment base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the center in the left-right direction to the right side. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper dish body 312, and the upper and rear sides are opened. A dish-shaped lower tray main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes, and a center in the left-right direction fixed to an upper portion of the lower tray main body 324 bulges forward in the same manner as the lower tray main body 324, and a front end thereof extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower dish cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and the right side of the lower plate cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side, and the right side is decorated. And a lower plate side cover 330 having a lower opening portion 330b that is opened to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, in the plate unit 300, an obliquely extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers a left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and a left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and a lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are disposed at the front and rear. A lower plate left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 from the rear side, and which is made of a sound permeable material. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are designed. And a side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes that are gently curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is made of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is hard to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 for pulling the game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of this dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction below the mouth 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper bowl supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide concave portion 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 is increased. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, and it is guided so as to roll to the right in the front view in the guide recess 310j, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself or herself to a game ball driving operation or a game with a game ball that has been driven in, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring early in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. As for the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in the left-right direction in a curved shape along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. This upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, whereas the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle and It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed part of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is not fixed.

The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle like the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to be integrated with the right side portion, and is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of an upper plate ball removing button 341, which will be described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be irregularly refracted and prevents the player from clearly seeing the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The bottom plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape that extends forward in a plan view, has a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and has a lower surface with a substantially central portion of the upper surface, and a central portion of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower dish cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored plating layer on the surface thereof, which has a metallic feeling (a matte state such as sandblasted rather than a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed through the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

The lower plate upper left side cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to one of the bottom surfaces of the plate unit 300. It has a plate-shaped portion that forms a part. The opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a lower speaker 821 (speaker for bass) provided in the body frame 3 described later, and the sound from the lower speaker 821 is played by the player. It can be transmitted to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the inside. ..

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover. The bottom surface between the base plate and the base plate 334 is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. Of the upper dish ball removal button 341 is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front surface side of the dish unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and an upper plate ball attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310 that slidably supports the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the vertical direction. And a removal base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and the ball guiding flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c that allows the game ball to roll.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is designed to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is loaded. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Note that the ball punching member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball punching slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition part 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is disposed below the lower plate body 324, between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower side cover 334, and forms the center of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The ball removing base 351 and a plate-like opening/closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening/closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the opening/closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower plate ball removing slide 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 slidably in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slide 353. ing.

This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which vertically penetrates. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 so that the closing portion 352a closes the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 is provided with an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removing slide 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slide 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slide 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slide 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 and the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides backward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

Then, as the opening/closing shutter 352 is rotated rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower dish ball removing slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slide 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if they are held in the same state as the extraction hole 3324b and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. Returning to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan There is. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 on the shaft support side (left side in front view).

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 includes a transparent ball rental unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan remaining display unit 363, and a loan remaining display unit 363 that is arranged behind the ball rental unit front cover 365. A ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and a rental button formed between the button openings 310m. A rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365 and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward are provided, and are transparent to close the display opening 310n. The lending remaining display portion 363 arranged on the rear side through the ball rental unit front cover 365 is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

In addition, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a protrusion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player's side) from the outer periphery of the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be used as a pachinko machine 1 having two storage plates and having a feeling similar to that of the conventional pachinko machine. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (a new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. Has become.

[Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and a base that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. A lower cover 424 that covers lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414 is mainly provided.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted and a lower portion of the operation portion holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

The dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer end from the upper end of the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending cylindrically downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a collar portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a coupling locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner tubular portion 401a, and the coupling locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operating portion 401a is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, the details of which will be described later. The step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the drawing, the contacting surfaces of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to increase the contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operating portion 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operating portion 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating vertically is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and project outward at the lower end in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the clearance causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detectable by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 of the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a ring-shaped sliding contact with the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being engaged with the connection engagement part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detecting pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detecting pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (lock projection 416f formed on an inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom portion of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e through which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 is seen from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416g extending downward from the lower surface to hold the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks it. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b that is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation unit holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling part) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically extends through the operation unit holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward at least to accommodate the driven gear 410, Equipped with. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed above the upper concave portion 420c, and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g located above different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 has a positioning boss for positioning each member, a mounting hole, and the like formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the opening 420a in the center. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the operation portion holding member 416 from above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on the top plate thereof. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outwardly, which is a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. Equipped with. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, with the operation member holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial operation member 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, the dial operation member 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper portion of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation portion 401 from coming off upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the drawing, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a to mount the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In this state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when a pressing operation is performed or a tapping operation is performed, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. .. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation part 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder part 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protruding part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and if the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed and the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be prevented from being damaged. Since it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, it is possible to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb impact and load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impacts and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is abutted against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c and impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405, the leg portions 420e are not disposed immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The portion supporting the member will bend due to the impact, and the base member 420 bends (elastically deforms), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base unit 420 applies to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operating portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operating portion holding member 416 holding the dial operating portion 401 comes off from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operating portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 in accordance with the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412. Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is made smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operating portion holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operating portion 401 can abut against the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operating portion 401 can be connected to the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent the depression from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation motor 414 frequently rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being defective due to overheating, and to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being damaged. It becomes possible to withstand a high load, and the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive motor 414 as described above can be sufficiently embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player. can do.

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more possible for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, so that the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation part 401 by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the dial operation part 401 is vibrated by virtue of the step 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation unit 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation part 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation part 405, a dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can be easily entertained with the operation unit 400, and the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405 can be guided. The characters "PUSH" displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or tilting greatly, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated by pressing. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner tubular portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner tubular portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the foreign matter makes it difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate and for the pressing operation unit 405 to become difficult to press. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operation portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position deviated from the center of the pressing operation unit 405 to the outer periphery), the dial operation unit 401 is surely contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance with respect to the pressing operation portion 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of malfunctions during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but it is also possible to easily stop it at a predetermined position or perform forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 51(B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. The handle base 502 is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis. The handle base 502 is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502. A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502, and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle body 504.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and that has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer circumference; a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510; The rotary position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A one-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504. A handle return spring 522 for urging the handle return spring 522 so as to return it to the rotation end in the direction.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and bulges rearward in a round shape, and has a rear end portion that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis of the handle body 504 is formed, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in the front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is configured to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launch strength according to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle main body 504 is rotated so that the firing strength is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 reaches the right side area on the right side of the center role object 2500, and the right side area. Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle main body 504 is turned so that the firing strength becomes smaller than a predetermined value, the game ball shot toward the game area 1100 flows down in the left area on the left side of the center role object 2500. In this way, it is possible to hit the game balls into the right side area and the left side area by the operation of the player. The ball speed of the game ball flowing down the right side area on the right side of the center character 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center character 2500. Then, a game ball flowing down in the right side area at a relatively high ball speed becomes possible to win a second starting opening 2102 described later, and a game ball flowing down in the left side area at a relatively low ball speed will be described later. It is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 2101.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle main body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 118) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive can be stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed, and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, the structure of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to a defect in hitting the game ball.

[Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52(A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 52(B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls inside, the front side of which is open, and a front cover 544 which closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball inlet 542a which is arranged in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball passage 542b that widens to the right in front view as it goes toward the front end of the cover base 542, and a second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. And a second ball passage 542d which communicates with the second ball inlet 542c and extends downward and is inclined downward toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e that is open upward, and can communicate the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b that is arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is adapted to be connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply to the upper plate 301 from 544a via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 from the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g from the plate unit 544b.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 that is pivotally supported, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full member detection sensor 550 does not detect the swing member 548. And 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and an upper end that rotates leftward in a front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is provided with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Are provided, and the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the rolling of the game ball can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, Even when the upper plate 301 is full, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. When the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also filled up, the game balls start rolling to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83), and the full tank branch unit 770. From the full tank outlet 776 of the foul cover unit 540 to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the second ball passage 542d stays in the accommodation space 546. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) stops the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. The person is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It is not detected, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base board 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 52(A), (B) and 53) has the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. Since the accommodation space 546 that retains the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, static electricity is generated by rubbing the game ball and resin, and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

For this reason, a metal ground rail 554 is provided at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance due to rolling of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate. There is. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped ground metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground metal fitting 556 at the left end can be electrically conductive to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). The earth metal fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (FIG. 18, FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game sphere by the ground rail 554 as described above, but electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, the electric charge accumulated in the resin will escape only around the ground even if it is grounded, and most of it remains. Then, the electrostatic induction by the electric charges may cause a malfunction of the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 that is close to the electrostatic induction.

A ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to the gaming machine, for example, on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such a situation, and electrostatic charge induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 even if the earth is not taken. Related to the invention relating to an antistatic mechanism for shielding the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and preventing static electricity escaping to the shielding metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. Is.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame, which is provided with an antistatic mechanism, as viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main part of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. Further, FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tin plate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. -Shaped shield plate 562 and a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than that of the shield plate 562 and insulates electric charges that have jumped to the shield plate 562 so as not to jump to surrounding conductors. The insulating sheet 570 is included.

The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-shaped conductive portion 563 that is conductively contacted by contacting the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the door frame 5 at an upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent and formed in the horizontal direction. Is located below and behind the conductive portion 563 with the boundary as a boundary, and is arranged substantially over the entire rear surface side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame 5, and is a substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564. And have.

A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Has been drilled.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and serves to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from surrounding conductors. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the shield plate 562 near the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 by adhesion.

55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 has the rear side covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 such that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located radially outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. Then, the conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into conductive contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 so that the static electricity is released.

Note that mounting bosses 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are provided at appropriate locations on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Further, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the grounding metal fitting 556 to the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 made of metal with screws so as to release static electricity to the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 at appropriate places. 154c are provided (see FIG. 56).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110g into the insertion hole 566, and the screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110.

Then, the foul cover unit 540 is arranged with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted into the mounting portion thereof, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. Further, the grounding metal fitting 556 has a screw inserted into its mounting portion, and further has a screw inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so as to escape.

The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached to the attachment boss 110g by screws together. A ground wire (not shown) is also fastened together with the ground metal fitting 556 by a screw and attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154.

[Operation of Antistatic Mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154 through the shield part 564 of the shield plate 562 which is in surface contact and the conductive part 563 which is in surface contact with the lower reinforcing metal plate 154. The thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 can shield the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

In addition, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the charges that have jumped to the shield plate 562 are transferred from the corners or end faces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). (Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Further, FIG. 60(A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 60(B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 61(A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having a rear opening, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launching device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a on the rear side of the front cover 581 to partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b; , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover and are supported rotatably around an axis extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball punching base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90° about the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launcher 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a, and enters the partition part 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically due to the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip swinging vertically in the ball feeding operation rod 586. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 moving forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

In addition, the ball-removing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball-sending unit 580 of the present example receives a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight 583d. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is regulated by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. At normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball-removing opening 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball-removing opening 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Incidentally, the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, so that the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 583a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is It is possible to prevent the partition part 583a from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the entire outer diameter in rear view is horizontally long. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c. V formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in a direction perpendicular (backward) to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to move away from each other. It has a character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is also provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time, is formed to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I to which the wire Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is played by the hitting ball launching device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempt to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the illegal moving path of the game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move to the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the impulsive force of the game ball I.

Thereby, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the illegal game ball I at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view). The cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 61D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened by the momentum due to the friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 and is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed in the game area 1100 with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw. You can prevent it from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588, so that an illegal act cannot be performed. Even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the force of the illegal game ball I and the gaming area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the ball hitting device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is reached. The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharging mechanism (ball-stripping member 583) are arranged, so that not only the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-stripping member 583 but also the ball-sending member 584 and the ball-striking device 650 are possible. When the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the number of game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and to hit the game ball. By the operation, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early, and it is possible to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, compared with a case where the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 are provided separately, only the ball feed unit 580 is attached to the ball feed member 580. Since the 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached to each other, the labor for assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper dish ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper dish ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 which can be opened and closed. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580 and the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition part 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition part 583a as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding device are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the admission port 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member The durability of 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition 583a, it can be made difficult to splash and the splash of the game ball can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

Further, since the partition part 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entry port 581a and the ball removal port 581b communicate with each other, when a problem occurs in the partition part 583a or the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340, the partition part 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and discharge ports are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (insertion device) side even though the discharge operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it can be made known to the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and it can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated through the bent rotation rod portion 583b. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the light with the rotary shaft 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the attachment recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front side, it is necessary to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material being sandwiched. Thus, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, so that the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. Transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are disposed on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement portion which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop piece 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, a modeling decoration of the door frame 5, that is, a geometrical decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame by cutting it at a substantially vertical center. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 closing the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. Further, the door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

The door frame 5 has greatly different appearances on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a natural rock rugged by a side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, which can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved plane shape.

Accordingly, in the door frame 5 of the present example, when viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from the above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to give the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, etc., the overall appearance of the island facility feels smooth and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to emit light with any color so as to surround it. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[Lighting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 that substantially corresponds to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is equipped with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and the gaming window 101 is made to emit light as appropriate. The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except for the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens parts 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It is provided with LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 214a and 216a and the like to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated to emit light more brightly.

As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which are directed toward the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decoration substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decoration substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to separately decorate and light. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be illuminated and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322 allows the upper plate front decorative member 316 to operate. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery on the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be illuminated and decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmissive columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as the above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery of the upper side of the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64), and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 63 and 64) and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, a substantially concentric shape is formed so as to surround the game window 101. A plurality of (two in this example) light-emitting decorations can be provided. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 63 and 64) that extends radially around the lower left-right center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper center group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper center of the. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that lights and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged on the lower side of the game window 101 is used to make the upper plate 301 emit light. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be played. The person can be informed.

The light emitting decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 have 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems, which is triple the number. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current in order to emit light with high intensity. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, it is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light from each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by making only the radial group 104 emit light, a light emission effect is produced in which the game window 101 is emitted as a center, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By doing so, a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly, or by making the radial group 104 emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light It is possible to give a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by making each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 individually emit light, it is possible to provide a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) are orbited.

Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a time saving game state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

Furthermore, by making each system 108a-108d of the lower group 108 light-emit appropriately, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by making the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 emit light as appropriate, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotating operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is produced. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of the present example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The flow of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600 and the prize ball unit 700 for opening is opened. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the door frame 5 except the game board 4 and electric parts provided in the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 which is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and which locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[Main body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 69). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is laid down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed on the main body frame base 600. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

Also, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion that spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1200 in the game board 4, and a predetermined position of the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605, the game board of the game board 4 being formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The left side of the game board 4 as viewed from the front side will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72, etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base body 110 in FIG. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further rearward than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall part 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 descends. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like), and the lower rear wall portion 604 passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis centered on the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. The operation piece 690b extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, so that by making contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

Further, in the body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. As shown in FIG. 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front side (in the axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in a front view. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction under the lower end of the door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is performed. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

Further, the main body frame base 600 is gently and obliquely descended from the upper right end toward the substantial center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then, at the approximate center in the left-right direction, the lower rear wall part 604. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from the middle of the up and down direction to a position slightly above and in which the game ball can roll. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the details will be described later, but a game ball rolled in the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Is rolling.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed on.

[Upper support bracket and lower support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 on the front end left end upper and lower rear view metal fixture mounting portions 610 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft supporting hole 634 (see FIG. 67) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 when viewed from the front, and the door frame 5 rotates toward the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) that regulates the end. In the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft supporting hole 634 that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extending portion. And a stopper 642d which is provided upright from the left end of the front view of 642b as viewed from the front and which restricts the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 in the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support holes of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 are fitted and inserted into the support protrusions 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are located coaxially with each other, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 634 of the door frame fitting 642 of the lower fitting fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 in an openable and closable manner. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Striking ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a ball hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and a launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, a ball stopper piece 662 that holds a game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap that the game ball cannot pass through, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position at which the played game ball can be hit.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the batting launcher 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b, which is oriented in the normal direction and has a tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c, which extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and is in contact with the stopper 664, are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to extend substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the abutting can be suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, etc., the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower part of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the fal space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction by a predetermined width. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. ing.

[Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing a rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. In addition, FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball rolling passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, the payout is made to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and that aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls that are aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof and the back cover 900 to the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear side. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. And is integrally molded with transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of a vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the award ball, the prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward, and the rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and a right side rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view rectangularly protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 and an outer peripheral wall portion 721. A discharge port 723 that is formed by a portion of the right rear part that projects rearward of the bottom wall portion 721 of the right side 722 and that opens downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed on the eaves portion 724 that extends to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 that extends rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in a plan view, and a prize ball formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and on both front side ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. An attaching portion 726 for attaching the tank 720 to the award ball tank attaching portion 711 of the award ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the drawing, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls rolling in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, In plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with a predetermined depth that is open at the top and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 78) that project further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are stored. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved back and forth in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball that are partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically penetrate and which the projecting piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 axially supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped up by the ball leveling member 727 to be stepped up, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the pair of alignment gears 732 is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth is shifted by half a pitch. Thereby, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 can be grounded to the outside through the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated so that the protrusion 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 b to the inside of the tank rail 731. By inserting into the projection rail 735a, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Then, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b that communicates with the left end (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b when viewed from the rear A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end on the right side (shaft support side) of the distribution space 741b in rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741 are the third gear. A rotation detection board 749 having a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a that are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the 747 interposed therebetween and are circumferentially equidistantly provided.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball that is attached to the unit base 741 and rolls in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, a rotation angle sensor 752 and a payout control board 4110, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, Equipped with.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a sensor cover 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact a game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. A grounding metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and a screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a by the ball break switch 750 by pressing the operation piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-off switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicating that the ball is out. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotating body 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting attaching portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate, and has an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment/detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the center in the up-down direction, and a relay board mounting portion. The sensor substrate mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and the through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. The heat can be easily dissipated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body is provided. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110 or operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. A third gear 747 that meshes with is adapted to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 82, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting sensor 751 one by one and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is arranged. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d are, from the lower end of the ball removing passage 741d, a ball removing passage 778 of a full tank branching unit 770, a body frame base ball removing passage 622 of the body frame base 600, and a substrate unit 800. The board unit base 810 can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when it is assembled to the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 79 and 83. The full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. At the same time, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are full, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the attachment locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole is lowered toward the front end from the rear end, and is opened upward in the substantial center of the rear end upper part in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And, the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball toward the front side from immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772, and the game ball that rolls through the normal passage 773 is discharged to the front to the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end in front view, and a full tank passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 83). (See), and the full-ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball rolled in the full-tank passage 775 to the front and opens to the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball rolling in the ball removal passage 778 is discharged to the front and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view. And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged so as to communicate with each other, and the game ball discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 to reach the plate unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 779 are main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls dispensed to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b and the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the upper bowl 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game balls and further game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be discharged from 544a to the side of the upper plate 301 stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 in the upstream is also filled through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 770. ..

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, until the full tank is resolved, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate becomes full like a conventional pachinko machine and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of the driving of the game ball, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game balls can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game is played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the inlet (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. Thus, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 for changing the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Further, the game balls sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if the game balls are exchanged for, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. ..

Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. It becomes possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage tray to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 of the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. Therefore, the substantial amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size in which the game balls can be rolled in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount (storage amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is stored. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the problem early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed to move the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped open/close shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end portion in front view to support the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. Drive rod 793b extending outward from the right side to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, when the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Also, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. Further, FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 92(A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92(B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 93(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 mounted on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 mounted on the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A firing power supply board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, a power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end formed to have a size substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front, a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and a peripheral side relay. And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that projects forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position at which the center of the shield wall portion 811 in the left-right direction is lowered and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. A cylindrical duct portion 814 that penetrates through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side in rear view (the right side in front view). ) A box accommodating portion 816 that is opened rearward and upward and is capable of accommodating the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls that have flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. With this, it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 attached so as to face the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-like passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the caliber of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 843 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later, and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Accordingly, in the state where the body frame 3 is assembled, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 67).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, the launch power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides its internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC/DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its small size, and the replacement operation of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the exchange operation. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its end of life and the driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply board 831 is easy. By doing so, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from an alternating current power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but charging/discharging is not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely long as compared with the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply substrate 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply substrate 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are provided not on the power supply board 851 but on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 which has a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristic Even if an illegal attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraudulently changing the launching power board 831 that has been optimized and intentionally changing the optimized driving strength, and at the same time making it difficult to carry out fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated or the like from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power board 831 is tampered with, the emission power board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC/DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 are changed to a new game. It can be matched with board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from decreasing. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the hall side.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be solved by doing so, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act is entered from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal board reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed, and the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position supporting the launch power supply board box 830 is rearward of the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the emission power supply board 831 can be easily attached/detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 supplies power to the emission solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives the game balls discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 on the left front side from the center in the left and right when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side surface (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box accommodating portion 843 that is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. And a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, and rolls through the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 to pass through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 to the rear of the board unit base 810. The game ball flowing down to the side and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge part 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving part 841 will be described later in detail through the discharge passage 842, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810. The recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and the heat from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 90, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall protruding rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminals 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 on the power supply board 851 face the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the power supply board box 850, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be easily turned off by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted on, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is easy to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which causes a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply and the power supply terminal 851 from coming off from the power supply board 851 due to the breakage of the power supply, and the pachinko machine 1 in which the trouble does not easily occur can be provided.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 is slid along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is hard to come off from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of operations continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long and thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 118) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and at one place of the plurality of separating/cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display unit or the CR unit 6 or the like installed on the island facility side when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) that is formed on the upper inside of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on the lower inside of the board mounting portion 871a. A terminal board box locking claw 871I for locking the lower end of the terminal board 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871I. You can do it.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference of the board base 871 has a size that allows the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 to be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f that is arranged on the left outer side of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The protrusions 871e of the board base 871 are set in a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, the protrusions 871e are provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is placed so that it is close to

Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear side in a vertically separated manner to form a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end as viewed from the rear side. And a locking portion 871h in the form of a rectangular tube that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a forward (to the side of the board base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-shaped engagements that can be engaged with the engagement holes 871f of the substrate base 871 that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 is in the shape of a thin box whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving backward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked in the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. Besides, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting with the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

In addition, the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b penetrating in the front-rear direction corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 can be opened and closed together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is used as the D-sub connector, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of the present example, in the assembled state, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the ridge 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to intrude an illicit tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal will not be bent. It is possible to surely prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 and reliably prevent an illegal act with respect to the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 abuts on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

Further, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent action and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state in which the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 (the back surface of the board). The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion of the base 871 and the 871c are arranged in the direction of the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since each of the impact walls 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is made to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is formed. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, it is possible to cover the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraud.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and an opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are axially supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and an unauthorized tool is allowed to enter, the unauthorized wall 875c prevents the unauthorized tool from connecting terminals. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if an attempt is made to insert a driver or the like between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the wiring cord-side terminal connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, a countermeasure is taken. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opened opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, which has a high crime prevention capability. Can be

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c is extended to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform fraud, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts and to detect fraudulent acts, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is turned to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the respective decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, a return button 362, a loan remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the rear cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a rear cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the rear cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking port 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall off from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 that is locked in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and the fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. The back cover 900 can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end of the main body 902 on the right side in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection cutout 910 in a front view. 912, and a confirmation cutout 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection cutout 910. Etc. are facing the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the check opening 912 so as to face the rear side, and at the same time, for checking. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to confirm the operation, the appearance, and the management state of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904 in an elongated shape. It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front, and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. These through holes 918 are the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the device, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since the back cover 900 can be held near the insertion hole 921 through the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male threaded portion 924a can be secured in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by a gap between the guide member 923 and the long hole 923b.

Further, a housing recess for housing the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 is inserted. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion to be screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be tightened only by pulling as compared with the engagement by the locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, or move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking opening. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923, which is movably attached, extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3 so that the fastening member 924 is fastened. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening members 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side security plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the drawing, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction with a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and the front end of the side piece 952a is viewed from the front right. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front surface from the rear end of the side surface piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d that extends longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction when viewed (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side of the game panel 1200 when viewed from the front is inserted (see FIG. 112).

In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-like protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 112). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength/rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 is enhanced, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the side surface crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to favorably prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread even if it is gouged by another tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the front-back dimension of the side piece 952a becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes strong, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side crime prevention plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the side face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the side face crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to reduce defects such as strength reduction during processing as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. 97(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 97(B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 98(A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 98(B) is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 4C is a rear perspective view showing the above, and FIG. Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding lever for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a front end right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed to have an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side) thereof. A hook through opening 1002, an upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, a screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward toward the middle, and a screw stopper portion. An upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protruding portion 1003 is provided, and the front end project from the lower ends of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 603 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attaching portion 625 via the interlocking screw.

The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw stopper 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, lower and middle sides are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole. Since the structure is such that the locking device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw, the lock device 1000 can be constructed with an extremely simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower parts of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the sliding rod 1024 for the door frame can be moved upward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof cutout portion 1007 formed on a closed side surface at a lower portion thereof, and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 when the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are mounted at two upper and lower positions in order to mount the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Is equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 99, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is adapted to be attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 on the plate-shaped surface thereof, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted therein. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement projection 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 in the front upper diagonal direction so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. Is oscillated (clockwise in FIG. 101(B)).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. In addition, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed in the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. This door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door hook hole 620 (see FIG. 67 and FIG. 72) formed in the main body frame base 600 protrudes forward to open the door. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, there is provided a guide projecting piece 1043 which projects in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at the upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side. The escape notch portion 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. Equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but is made of a metal including the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base body 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

Further, the rivet oblong hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet oblong hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 is pivoted to lower the body frame sliding rod 1050. Is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018 when the second engaging projection 1018 is rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding blade for the main body frame are inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without backlash.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed. In a state in which they are overlapped with each other, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the body frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is bridged between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 is engaged with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the inclined portions of the upper sides of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hooks 1054, 1065 upward claws and the closing plates 24, 25 are again locked, and the main body frame slide is performed. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the second engaging projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 by force and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire from between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 for the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the locking device 1000 of the present example does not engage in a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032. The second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tampering prevention notch. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging cutout portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement cutout 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released, and the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 101(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming a case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 are pulled down. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illicit acts cannot be performed easily.

As described above, the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base body 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base body. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased, and even if the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the inside The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, lower and middle sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws by using a screw, the structure is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attaching piece 1008 and a cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are provided near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A lock mounting hole that is screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the locking device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are shown to be completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base (lock base), and a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (locking base) and a peripheral wall portion 605. The structure may be such that it can be housed, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (backward and rearward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The award ball tank 720 storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the award ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710 is arranged. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Part of the prize ball device 740, which is attached to the rear side of the rear side 710b, has a transparent side 904 and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600. Since the transparent back cover 900 arranged in the same plane is provided, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. A pachinko machine 1 that can visually check the rear side surface and can easily inspect the rear side of the game board 4 (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is detached from the front side of the 601 and the game machine 4 is removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, fraudulent acts can be prevented, and the fraudulent device attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside. The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 is used. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the rearward projection, it is possible to catch or abut other members in the installed island equipment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, and the trouble such as the deformation of the member such as the synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Further, the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game balls cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game balls spill on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game balls pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 111. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 106(A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit on the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 106(B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

In addition, FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like, viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is a game of FIG. 107 viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 107 taken in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 111 is a game board as seen from the back of FIG. 110. FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1200 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1200, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 is provided which is capable of displaying the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. This game board 4 further includes a front unit attached to the front surface of the game panel 1200 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200, although the illustration in FIGS. 102 to 109 will be omitted and the details will be described later. It is provided (see FIGS. 113 and 116, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic structure formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1200. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view toward the left in a clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to an obliquely upper right portion. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary portion between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112, and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 and which is arranged at the lowermost end and is lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112. Only the closed position extending upward and the open position in which the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front can be rotated and can be returned to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is hit strongly with the ball launch device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting openings 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the table unit 2000 which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, by the outer outlet guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1113, the inner rail 1112 is guided to the outer outlet 1151 of the game panel 1200, and is discharged from the outer outlet 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ing.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball, and also allows the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 that extends to the front end and is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an injustice tool such as a piano wire is intruded from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the injustice tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the post-crime prevention protrusion 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even in the inner rail 1112, the rail crime prevention groove 1118, and the crime prevention rear projection piece 182, a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the inside of the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in the front view in the vertical direction and is spaced apart in the vertical direction, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are separated in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arcuate shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122, which is a rectangular notch extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recessed portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 mounted inside the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

In addition, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is seen in a front view. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1200, and the game board 4 is provided with a game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branching unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view to stick a certificate paper for certificate confirmation. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band in a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

In the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1200 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1200, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1200 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1200.

[Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1200 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1200 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This game panel 1200 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at a lower portion in the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end to the left in the front view at the lower end. And a downward opening of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the lower right corner in front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

Further, in the game panel 1200, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower portion, and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 105) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1200 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1200 in the game board 4 of the present example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200. Further, the game panel 1200 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-hole 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the up-down direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall portion has the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1200, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. It should be noted that the out-ball discharging section 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All of the game balls discharged from are passed through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed such that the tips are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1200 and then fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1200 can be assembled, and the game panel 1200 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side at a rear end left side end of the rear wall portion, and a fixing portion. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear side. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals, etc. mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1172. In addition, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 that fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end in rear view with two elastic fixing pieces 1175 sandwiched therebetween to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. Possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) that is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been opened improperly can be clearly discriminated visually from the outside.

Since four sealing parts 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and the hermetic seal is cut when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts from being performed.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by other than visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display unit 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

On the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106(A), a game state that changes depending on a game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view. The game state indicator 1183 for one LED and the two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of holdings of the game balls to the first starting opening 2101. First special symbol memory display 1184 for, and the lottery result of the first special symbol which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 (first Special lottery result) 1st special symbol indicator 1185 which consists of one 7 segment LED for displaying as the 1st special symbol and 1st special symbol indicator 1185 is arranged diagonally right above, to 2nd starting mouth 2102 Second special symbol display device 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol that has been drawn by the acceptance of the game balls, and the second, The second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, which is composed of two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the two special symbol display 1186, ing.

Further, in the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180, the number of reservations relating to the passage of the gate section 2301 by the game ball is arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display device 1186. A normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and a normal lottery result selected by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol storage display is displayed as a normal symbol. Ordinary symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for, and the diagonal right upper side of the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit (condition device operates The round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening 2103 is repeated.

The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and the color of the emitted light and the lighting and blinking. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation time short game state, jackpot game state, etc.).

Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2101. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memorized number) of the first special symbol that has been held (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b.・The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102. In this case, the start of variable display is held (stored) and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b.・The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a, 1187b. Lights up together, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery that is selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped by the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color LED that is capable of changing its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting/blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result which is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the start of the variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol storage display 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. It is possible to display the number of ordinary symbols to be reserved by sequentially lighting up to 1188d. Incidentally, in this example, up to four variable display of ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b made of predetermined LEDs, and by turning on these indicator lamps, the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed. It is like this.

As shown in FIG. 106(A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of a function display board (not shown). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1200, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. 106(B). In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

This function display unit 1180 can also achieve the same effects as the above, and the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting attention to the movable effect and effect image.

[Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1200 of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-shaped plate that can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, which is thinner than the game panel 1200 described above, and is larger than the outer shape of the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. Has been formed. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (gaming panel 1200), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and the lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150 and the like are provided from the front side with respect to the openings 1215. The unit it has is designed to be inserted and fixed.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1200 made of a wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is arranged on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. A predetermined amount is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) with a predetermined gap into which the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 can be inserted. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted therein. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side thereof, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state where the rear surface-side outer peripheral portion projects rearward, and the recessed amount ( The depth is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) capable of accommodating the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 116) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be prevented from protruding. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodation recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that projects forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c on the front surface of the back box 3010 (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small inner diameter hole are mixed to have a proper diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is designed to be a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the hitting ball launching device 650. However, the guidance is smooth. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a thinned-out portion 1230, so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape and supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. Therefore, a box-shaped rib is formed in order to prevent it.

In addition, in this panel holder 1220, a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig is formed, and the gaming panel 1200 is held in the obstacle nail implanting device. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower portion of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a lower end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and extending downward. Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage notch 1123 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122, and the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 108 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes for attaching and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and by fitting the out ball discharge groove 1235 with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail arranging device without modifying the arranging device and increase the cost for arranging the obstacle nail G. It can be suppressed.

Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, which is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by only replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing parts of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a different form from the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Note that the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 110 and 112 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220, which are different from those in the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as in the example of FIGS. 107 to 109 except for the above, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

The front component member 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different, and it is not provided with a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. Note that other configurations are similar to those of the previous component member 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using this front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending inward in a clockwise direction in a front view from the out-port guide surface 1115 as a base point up to the stoppers 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arcuate portion is formed between the stopper portion 1114 and the right-hand certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper portion 1114, and the lower end of the arcuate portion is provided with an outlet port. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a linear shape that is inclined so as to decrease toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

The front component member 1110A of the present example has a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-described front component member 1110, and the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game region 1100. You can do it.

[Crime prevention structure for pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board accommodated.

First, as shown in FIG. 112, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side-face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and its vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1200 of the game board 4 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side-side piece 952a to a substantially right-angled inner side (open side). The piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side surface piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of space on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and a substantially inward direction inward from the rear end of the side surface piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side surface security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side surface piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. The shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft supporting side is provided with a shaft supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opening to the outside (shaft supporting side). In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 has a higher strength due to the shaft-supporting side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft supporting side is provided. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is generated. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 formed in the substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is adapted to be inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the pivot side of the body from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the door 3.

Further, since the side surface security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and the rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1200 of the game board 4, the body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is temporarily assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be penetrated from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1200), and an illegal act is performed. Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side crime prevention plate 950 so as to cover the outside thereof, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the side surface side It is able to fully counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible to intrude an unauthorized tool to the rear side of the rear end of the middle piece 952c, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 are replaced by the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and an unauthorized act can be prevented. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device and enhance the deterrence against the unauthorized activity. ing.

Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4, it is possible to visually recognize through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. Even when tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is detached from the outside It is possible to easily find out from them, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some troubles by them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board as seen diagonally from the upper right front. Further, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 117 is disassembled for each main member (however, the center accessory 2500 is not shown) constituting the game board to be obliquely rearward. It is the perspective view seen.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “sphere”) as a game medium is generated. It is provided with a frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines and forms the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

The game panel 1200 of the present example is a transparent panel plate 1210 which is a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A and whose outer shape is smaller than that of the front component member 1110A. , A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 which is detachably held from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in the transparent panel plate 1210.

In addition, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. A function display unit 1180 which is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and is arranged at a position where it is visible to the player side from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko machine 1. A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) which is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 is covered from the rear side. Thus, the board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

The table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example includes a first attacker device 2100 arranged in the lower part of the game area 1100 and directly above the out port 1151, and an upper right side of the first attacker device 2100 (below the movable accessory 2600). ), a second attacker device 2150, a gate unit 2300 arranged near the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game area 1100, and a frame-shaped center role arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100. Object 2500.

The first attacker device 2100 includes a first special winning opening 2103, an opening/closing member 2106 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and a driving unit that drives the opening/closing member 2106 to open and close. Normally, the first special winning opening 2103 is closed by the opening/closing member 2106 so that the game ball cannot be received. In the jackpot game, the opening/closing member 2106 is opened and closed to play the first big winning opening 2103. The ball can be accepted.

The second attacker device 2150 includes a second special winning opening 2153, an opening/closing member 2156 that allows the plate-shaped thickness portion to be visually recognized in a front view, and a driving unit that drives the opening/closing member 2156 in the front-rear direction. Normally, it is closed by the opening/closing member 2156 so that the game ball cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2153. In the jackpot game, the opening/closing member 2156 is opened and closed to play the game in the second big winning opening 2153. The ball can be accepted.

In addition, when the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2101, the jackpot game that allows the acceptance of the game ball into the first special winning opening 2103 is executed. Then, when the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 is a big hit, the jackpot game in which the game ball can be accepted into the second special winning opening 2153 is executed. To be done.

Here, in the jackpot game (the jackpot game based on the result of the first special lottery) in which the first big winning hole 2103 of the first attacker device 2100 is opened, the game ball is shot in such a manner that the game ball flows down the left side area. In the jackpot game (the jackpot game based on the result of the second special lottery), in which the second jackpot 2153 of the second attacker device 2150 is opened, the game ball is flown in the right side area to shoot the game ball. Done. However, in the jackpot game based on the result of the second special lottery, even if a game ball is launched in the form of flowing down the left side area, the player rarely wins the second big winning opening 2153, but based on the result of the first special lottery. In the jackpot game, when the game ball is shot down in the right side area, it is possible to win the first big winning opening 2103.

Further, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) and the front side is opened, and an opening penetrating in the front-back direction in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, a back production unit 3200 arranged above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box. A lower back production unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in 3010 and a lower back right arranged between the lower back production unit 3400 and the front decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The rendering unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect image by a character or the like is displayed, and, for example, a decorative pattern composed of numbers or characters (corresponding to “812” in FIG. 114) can be displayed. The decorative symbol is displayed in a corresponding manner while the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped, in principle (condition that it is not the super speed mode described later) (2) In response to these, the first special symbol lottery result (first special lottery result) and the second special symbol lottery result (second special lottery result) are displayed. In the following, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the first special lottery and the second special lottery, it may be simply referred to as “special lottery”.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 118) having a peripheral control section 4140 and a liquid crystal control section 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 is provided.

The game board 4 of the present embodiment is a wide area in which the game balls can be sufficiently rolled between the left outer circumference of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (inner circumference of the front component member 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (it is hit with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is upstream of the hitting portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. The right side passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the side. Here, the right passage 2545 has a width that allows the game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls flowing down the right passage 2545 are arranged on the path of the right passage 2545 while maintaining the flow speed thereof. It is guided to the gate unit 2300. Above the gate unit 2300, four guide nails 2350 that guide the game balls flowing down the right side passage 2545 to the gate unit 2300 are planted side by side in a square shape. The game ball flowing down the right side passage 2545 is always guided to the four guide nails 2350, and further, with a probability close to 100% by the four guide nails 2350, the flow speed is almost maintained and the gate unit 2300 is maintained. It is guided to the gate portion 2301. That is, the game ball hit toward the right side area is always guided to the guide nail 2350 in a state where the flow-down speed is not reduced and the flow-down speed is maintained, and very rarely is guided to the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300. Most of them are guided to the gate portion 2301 in the high speed state, although they may not be won (in the time saving game state, the second starting opening 2102 is also won in the high speed state).

Below the gate unit 2300, a movable accessory 2600 that can advance to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery is arranged. On the right side of the movable accessory 2600, a rectifying passage 2610 is formed in which the game balls are rectified by flowing down the game balls one by one.

A protrusion is formed in the flow control passage 2610 from the front surface of the game panel 1200 toward the player side. The game ball flowing down the flow control path 2610 flows down in a state where a speed higher than a certain speed is maintained as compared with the speed flowing down the left side area, although the acceleration of the flow down speed is suppressed by contacting this protrusion. However, since all the game balls flowing down the straightening passage 2610 come into contact with the above-mentioned projections, the flow speeds of the game balls flowing down the straightening passage 2610 are almost equalized, and the game balls and the game balls that are adjacent to each other in the downflow direction. The intervals are almost equal.

For example, in the jackpot game in which the second big winning opening is opened and closed based on the result of the second special lottery, the game ball hardly wins in the second starting opening 2102 (the time saving function is not available during the big winning game. (Because it is operated), the game ball flowing down the right side region is guided to the flow control passage 2610. Then, the game ball flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 is guided to the second attacker device 2150 via the rectifying passage 2650 inclined downward from right to left. A wall 2655 is erected in the rectifying passage 2650 so that the game balls do not drop on the player side. Although not shown, two rib-shaped protrusions (hereinafter, referred to as “wall-side protrusions”) extending in the vertical direction are formed inside the wall 2655 (on the side of the flow rectifying passage 2650) at predetermined intervals. There is. Further, on the surface of the game panel 1200 facing the wall 2655, two columnar protrusions (hereinafter, referred to as “panel-side protrusions”) extending vertically are formed at predetermined intervals. Here, the wall-side projection and the panel-side projection are provided so as to be offset from each other in the left-right direction. More specifically, when viewed from the front, the first wall-side protrusion is on the rightmost side, the first panel-side protrusion is on the left side, and the second wall-side protrusion is on the left side. There is a second panel side protrusion.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down the flow control passage 2610 first comes into contact with the first wall-side projection. At this time, although the ball speed of the game ball is once reduced, the game ball moves again by being accelerated to the left side in the front view while avoiding the first wall side projection. Then, this game ball next contacts the first panel-side protrusion. At this time, although the ball speed of the game ball is temporarily reduced, the game ball moves again by being accelerated to the left side in the front view while avoiding the first panel side protrusion. Furthermore, this game ball comes into contact with the second wall-side protrusion, and the ball speed temporarily decreases, but in the form of avoiding the second wall-side protrusion, it is accelerated again to the left side in front view, and the game ball is Moving. And, this game ball, while contacting the second panel side protrusion, the ball speed is temporarily reduced, but it is accelerated again to the left side when viewed from the front while avoiding the second panel side protrusion and the game ball Moves.

The second attacker device 2150 is arranged below the movable accessory 2600 (more specifically, below the left side of the rectifying passage 2650), and the game ball that has passed through the rectifying passage 2610 is guided toward the second attacker device 2150. It

By the way, the game sphere flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 abuts on the wall-side projection and the panel-side projection alternately, and therefore, while repeatedly decelerating and accelerating the ball speed, it moves in a zigzag shape in the front-back direction as seen from the player. While being guided to the second attacker device 2150. That is, the rectifying passage 2610 is located just before the second special winning opening 2153, while allowing the game balls that flow down toward the second attacker device 2150 one after another to flow down in the right side region at a relatively high ball velocity. It can be said that the rectifying passage 2650 is configured to reduce the ball speed of the game ball to a ball speed slower than the game ball flowing down the left side region. In addition, although the ball speed of the game ball is reduced in the flow control passage 2610, the ball speed of the game ball is accelerated again after it comes into contact with the second panel-side protrusion formed on the leftmost side. The game balls will be won in the second big winning opening 2153 in the state where is maintained. Therefore, in the flow control passage 2610, as shown in FIG. 115, while the gaming balls are sequentially supplied to the second special winning opening 2153 as a ball matrix in which the distances between the gaming balls are narrowed at substantially equal intervals, It is possible to vigorously win the second big winning opening 2153. As a result, it is possible to easily understand that it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls simply by confirming such a ball queue waiting for winning at the second entrance 2153. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flow paths of the game balls when the game balls are fired toward the right side area are summarized into three patterns. The first pattern is the pattern of the ball passage in the super-speed mode in the time saving game state, and most of the game balls shot toward the right area enter the second big winning opening 2153 to win the second big winning. It is a pattern in which the game ball does not exist on the downstream side of the mouth 2153. The second pattern is a pattern of a ball flow path in a jackpot game in which the second big winning opening 2153 is opened and closed, and a game ball shot toward the right side area is a pattern in which the second big winning opening 2153 is won. .. The third pattern is a pattern of the ball passage in the normal speed mode in the time saving game state, in which the game ball shot toward the right area does not win the second big winning opening 2153 (on the opening/closing member 2156). This is the pattern toward the outlet 1151 (passing through). In the time saving game state, the time saving function (also referred to as the opening extension function) is activated, and the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 is facilitated.

In addition, the game area 1100 is provided with a first starting opening 2101 and a second starting opening 2102 through which a predetermined special lottery result is drawn by taking a game ball as an opportunity. The first starting opening 2101 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and above the first attacker device 2100.

The second starting port 2102 is arranged below the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300, and in a normal state, it is closed by a movable piece 2305 that slides in the front-rear direction. By sliding the movable piece 2305 toward the back side, the game ball can be received. That is, the second starting opening 2102 is normally unable to accept the game ball, and the game ball can be accepted based on the result of the normal lottery that is selected by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2301. It is said to be a variable winning hole. It should be noted that the game balls can pass through the gate portion 2301 one by one, and a gate sensor 2302 that detects the passage of the game balls is provided inside the gate portion 2301.

As described above, in the game area 1100, the game ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center role object 2500 is a game ball flowing down the left side area although it is possible to win the first starting opening 2101. Most are discharged from the outlet 1151. However, in the normal game state in which neither the probability variation function nor the time saving function operates and the chance state described later, the winning in the second starting opening 2102 is expected even if the game ball is shot toward the right side area. Since it is not possible, the game is played so that the game ball flows down to the left side area.

However, in the time saving game state, most of the game balls shot toward the right side region do not reach below the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the approximate center of the game region, and the upper right hand side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( That is, since the second start opening 2102 arranged on the right side of the game area 1100) is won at high speed, the game ball is lost on the downstream side of the second start opening 2102. That is, as long as the winning in the second starting opening 2102 is properly made, many game balls are suddenly disappeared above the right hand side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and as shown in FIG. 114, the second starting opening 2102. The game ball does not exist on the downstream side. Therefore, without directly moving the player's gaze from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the second starting opening 2102, it is only necessary to feel the atmosphere as to whether or not there are many game balls in the lower region of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It becomes possible to easily grasp the winning situation or the like at the second starting opening 2102, and by doing so, the advantageous game is concentrated by focusing on the display related to the design variation due to the decorative design displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. You will be able to entertain.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a always controls to the probability variation game state until the special lottery is performed a certain number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot game is finished, unless it is won. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a controls the time saving game state from the end of the jackpot game until the special lottery is performed at the longest fixed number of times. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability variation short game state is controlled until the special lottery is performed at the longest fixed number of times after the jackpot game is over. Here, the probability variation short time gaming state refers to a state in which both the probability variation function and the time reduction function operate.

In the present embodiment, the details will be described later, but the number of times the probability variation function operates (the number of special lottery) after the jackpot game is finished is constant, but the number of times the time saving function (also referred to as the opening extension function) operates ( The number of special lottery) is not always constant. As will be described later, the last 5 times in the time saving game state is not a time saving because it becomes a slow mode, but in the last 5 times, the function that the variation time becomes longer than the normal game state operates, In the present embodiment, this is also referred to as time saving. Then, when the time saving game state of up to 100 times ends without winning the special lottery, the state shifts to the chance state.

The chance state continues until the special lottery is performed 19 times. Further, as will be described later in detail, the chance state includes a state in which the probability variation function operates and a state in which the probability variation function does not operate. However, in the chance state, the time saving function does not operate. This chance state is difficult to grasp externally, but the probability change function may be activated internally, so that the player can be expected to win the special lottery. Further, in the chance state, a display effect is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, showing that the expectation of winning is higher than in the normal gaming state.

After the jackpot game is over, the probability variation function may be activated with a probability of 100%, or may be activated with a probability lower than that. Further, it is needless to say that the number of times the probability varying function operates and the number of times the time saving function operates are not limited to a specific number and can be appropriately changed.

By the way, in the control of the time saving game state (time saving control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to "255/255" (per 100%). And, in the time-saving game state that is performed 100 times at the longest, until the specified number of times (for example, 20 times) special lottery is performed, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short, and the super fast mode ends, and this super fast mode ends. Then, the normal speed mode in which the variation time of the second special symbol becomes longer than the super speed mode is set. This normal speed mode continues until the specified number of times (for example, 75 times) of special lottery is performed after the super speed mode is finished. And, about the prescribed number of times (for example, 5 times) immediately before the time saving game state ends, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the normal speed mode, and the slow speed is longer than the variation time in the non-time saving game state. It becomes a mode. Then, when this slow speed mode ends, the time saving game state ends. In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the shortest in the super speed mode, then the shortest in the normal speed mode, and the longest in the slow speed mode, but this is when the result of the second special lottery is lost. is there. However, in all modes of super speed mode, normal speed mode and slow speed mode or any mode, the variation time of the second special symbol, super speed mode is the shortest, then normal speed mode is short, slow speed mode is the longest It may be determined by a lottery so that In this way, when the variation time of the second special symbol is determined by lottery, basically, the variation time of the second special symbol, the super speed mode is the shortest, then the normal speed mode is short, the slow speed mode is the longest. Although it is determined to be, very rarely, for example, it may be determined so that the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal speed mode is shorter than that in the super speed mode. Also, basically, the fluctuation time in the slow speed mode is determined to be longer than the fluctuation time in the non-time saving game state, but rarely the fluctuation in the non-time saving game state is longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the slow speed mode. It may be decided to increase the time.

In any of the super speed mode, the normal speed mode and the slow speed mode, when the jackpot game is executed again, the number of the second special lottery in each mode is reset, and the game after the jackpot game is finished. The state starts from super speed mode. Therefore, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is not obtained and a jackpot game is played in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice, if such a jackpot game is performed during the super-speed mode, this It is possible that the number of ultra-fast modes performed up to and including 0 is reset and starts over from 0.

In the time saving game state, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2305 is in the open state after the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped (the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102). The time that is maintained in the retracted state) is "5.5 seconds". That is, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the normal hit is always won, and the passed game ball has a guide route (not shown) that can gain time due to, for example, the shape of the recess. By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol in a time shorter than the time (0.08 seconds) until it reaches the movable area of the movable piece 2305 through, the game ball that triggered the normal winning Are received in the second starting port 2102 as they are. The movable piece 2305 is maintained in the open state (the retracted state where the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102) for "5.5 seconds", and then the closed state (in the second starting opening 2102). It operates so that the game ball is in a retreat state where it cannot be accepted.

On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state where the time saving function does not operate, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds). Acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102 is disabled. In the non-time saving game state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol may be 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving game state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is When it hits, the movable piece 2305 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the time saving game state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2102 and then move forward again. The game ball may not be received in the second starting opening 2102.

In other words, in the non-time saving game state, since the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is 0%, in this case, even if the player hits right, it is impossible or extremely low to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. It will be a prize. Then, in the non-time saving game state, the game ball that has been driven into the right side of the center role object 2500, after passing through the gate portion 2301, is not received by the second starting port 2102 but is guided to the straightening passage 2610. Become. Therefore, in the non-time saving game state, aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that a large number of game balls are won in the first starting port 2101, not in the second starting port 2102, a game ball is shot (so-called "so-called" "Left-handed" is considered to be advantageous for the player, even in consideration of the superiority and inferiority of the privilege at the time of jackpot winning between the first starting opening 2101 side and the second starting opening 2102 side.

On the other hand, in the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2305 of the second starting opening 2102 is retracted for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). By doing so, it becomes easy to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the time saving game state, a large number of game balls are won in the second starting port 2102, not in the first starting port 2101, so that the game balls are aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right"). It is considered to be advantageous for the player to hit the ball.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state (the time saving gaming state) in which the so-called opening extension function operates is set to "255/255", but the ordinary lottery causes a loss. Also, it is not always necessary that the regular win is 100% so that the regular win is easily set.

Further, as the time saving control, control for increasing the winning probability of the above-mentioned normal symbol from the non-time saving game state, control for reducing the time required for the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol from the non-time saving game state, the second starting opening 2102 Control for extending the period for retracting the movable piece 2106 of the non-time saving game state, control for increasing the number of times the movable piece 2106 of the second starting opening 2102 is retracted for the non-time saving game state, first special symbol display device One of the control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol on the 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900) than the non-time saving game state. One or any combination (or all) may be executed.

Next, the variation time of the special symbol in each of the super speed mode, the normal speed mode and the slow speed mode will be described.

In the super-speed mode from the end of the jackpot game to the second special lottery, for example, 20 times, in the case where the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the number of reserved second special symbols starts changing. When it becomes "0" later (that is, only when the fluctuation starts from now on), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "5.5 seconds", and the number of reserved second special symbols fluctuates. When it becomes "1" to "3" after the start (that is, when there is a hold after the fluctuation is started), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is an extremely short time of "0.15 seconds". However, after the second special symbol is variably displayed over these variation times, a stop time of "0.5 seconds" is provided. Then, when the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" to "3", the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to the start of the next variable display is "0.65 seconds". And, the holding of the second special symbol will be digested at an extremely short interval. Here, since the number of game balls shot toward the game area 1100 per minute is 100, the second special lottery will be performed on most of the game balls shot toward the game area 1100. .. In addition, when the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is a hit, a relatively long time is set, for example, the variation time of the second special symbol is "23 seconds".

In the normal speed mode from the end of the super speed mode to the second special lottery, for example, 60 times, in the case where the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the number of reserved second special symbols changes. When it becomes "0" after the start (that is, when only the fluctuation starts from now on), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "12 seconds", and the number of reservations of the second special symbol starts fluctuation. When it becomes "1" to "3" later (that is, when there is a hold after the fluctuation has started), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "1.5 seconds", which is shorter than the normal gaming state. It's a longer time than super fast mode. However, after the second special symbol is variably displayed over these variation times, a stop time of "0.5 seconds" is provided. If the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is a win, a relatively long time is set, for example, the variation time of the second special symbol is "25 seconds".

Furthermore, in the slow speed mode in which the second special lottery is performed, for example, five times from the end of the normal speed mode to the end of the time saving game state, in the case where the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is lost, When the hold number of the second special symbol becomes “0” after the fluctuation starts (that is, only when the fluctuation starts from now on), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is “11 seconds”, and When the number of holding of two special symbols becomes "1" to "3" after the fluctuation starts (that is, when there is a hold after the fluctuation starts), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "11 seconds", and usually It is longer than the fast mode. However, after the second special symbol is variably displayed over these variation times, a stop time of "0.5 seconds" is provided. If the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is a win, a relatively long time is set, for example, the variation time of the second special symbol is "25 seconds".

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reservation of the second special symbol is given priority over the reservation of the first special symbol, and when the number of retained second special symbols is "0", it is "1". ~ Since it is set longer than the case of "3", even if there is a hold of the first special symbol, it becomes difficult to digest the hold of the first special symbol. In the time saving game state, if the result of the special lottery for the first special symbol is a loss, regardless of whether it is the super speed mode or the normal speed mode, the normal fluctuation is performed over a fixed time (for example, 11 seconds). Be seen.

Also, in the normal game state (non-probability variation and non-time saving game state), a game aiming for a big hit will be performed by a special lottery for the first special symbol by so-called left hitting, but in this normal game state, the first special symbol If the result of the special lottery is a loss, 11 seconds is set as the variation time with the highest selection rate (excluding the shortening variation when the so-called holding number is equal to or more than a predetermined number), and the loss in the slow speed mode is performed. The variation time of the second special symbol at the time (11 seconds) and the variation time at the time of losing the first special symbol in the normal game state (11 seconds) are the same variation time. In this way, even though it is in the probability variation short game state, by preparing the slow mode which is the same variation time as the normal gaming state just before the end of the probability variation short gaming state, this slow mode is, so to speak, a normal gaming state. It functions as a break-in period for the player, and reduces the discomfort caused by the gap in the fluctuation time when switching from the fast-changing short-time gaming state, which is digested at high speed including the super-speed mode, to the normal gaming state where the lottery is slowly digested. I have to. The variation time set in the slow mode for reducing such discomfort is equivalent to the variation time of the first special symbol loss in the normal game state (for example, 10 seconds or 12 seconds) or long variation time (for example, 20 seconds).

In this way, in the super speed mode in which the holding of the second special symbol is digested at high speed, when the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 1100, the right side passage 2545 of the right side passage 2545 is maintained while maintaining the flowing speed. High speed winnings are successively and successively applied to the second starting opening 2102 on the route, and each time the second starting opening 2102 is won at a high speed, a second special lottery for holding based on this high speed winning is successively and rapidly applied. It will be digested. As a result, in the super-speed mode, the ball speed of the game ball in the game area until the winning in the second starting opening 2102 is increased to win a high speed, as well as the digestion speed in the second special lottery, Each time there is a high-speed winning in the second starting slot 2102, the second special lottery will be dramatically improved to the extent that the second special lottery can be exhausted at high speed one after another. Therefore, it becomes possible to strongly give the impression that the progress speed of the game is dramatically increased in combination with the apparent speed feeling (ball speed) of the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 1100. With a game full of a sense of speed, it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, like the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is over, 100% or even if not 100%, with a probability close to this, until the predetermined number of times of special lottery is performed, the probability variation short time game only. In the pachinko machine 1 controlled to the state, if the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, the probability variation time short game state ends, and the state is controlled to the normal game state. A player who plays a game with such a pachinko machine 1 has a smaller remaining number controlled as a time-shortened gaming state (the number of remaining times of the second special lottery when both the probability variation function and the time-saving function are activated). However, it is usual to feel frustrated that the jackpot game is not played and the game goes to the normal game state. By causing the player to feel such frustration, the monotony of the game in the probability variation short game state is reduced. However, even if the probability variation short game state ends when the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, immediately after the jackpot game ends and the probability variation short game state is started, the special game proceeds to the normal game state without winning. There is a tendency not to be so conscious of doing (the probability variation short game state ends). As described above, the game is apt to be monotonous while it is not so conscious of shifting to the normal game state without winning the special lottery. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, after the jackpot game is finished, it is controlled to the probability variation short game state, but the second special is limited to a limited period of 20 times at the longest. The variable time of the symbol (the time during which the second special lottery is consumed) is controlled to the super speed mode which is extremely shortened. As a result, while reducing the monotony of the game in the probability changing short game state, it is possible to maintain the frustration that can be given to the player when the remaining number of the probability changing short game state is small, and suppress a decrease in interest. It becomes possible to do.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time saving game state after the jackpot game is finished is executed in the order of the super speed mode, the normal speed mode, and the slow speed mode, but not limited to this, for example, normal You may make it perform in order of a speed mode, a super speed mode, a normal speed mode, and a slow speed mode. In other words, the period of feeling frustrated that it might shift to the normal game state without the jackpot game being played (the specific period prior to this when the probability variation short game state ends) is super-speed. The mode may not be controlled (the normal speed mode or the slow speed mode may be controlled).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is arranged to be controlled to the super speed mode immediately after the jackpot game ends, but in such a pachinko machine, even in the super speed mode after the jackpot game ends, It is advisable to continuously perform the big hit game effect that is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the big hit game. That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 does not perform the display effect indicating that the jackpot game is over even if the jackpot game is over, and the display effect that is being performed during the jackpot game is continuously performed even in the super speed mode. In this way, when the super speed mode is switched to the normal speed mode, the display effect indicating that the jackpot game is finished is controlled. In super speed mode, not only is the probability of winning the special lottery increased, but as mentioned above, the change of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time, so the result of the second special lottery can be a big hit during super speed mode. It is highly likely. When the result of the second special lottery in the super speed mode is a big hit, it is difficult to grasp that the big hit game has ended, although the big hit game has ended internally. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 as well, the display effect indicating that the jackpot game has ended is not held immediately and is suspended, and when the super-speed mode ends, a display effect that allows the user to grasp that the jackpot game has ended is performed. The display effect during the big hit game until then is changed to the display effect in the normal game state. As a result, when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit during the super speed mode, it is as if the super long jackpot game exceeding the specified number of rounds is executed instead of the conventional jackpot game such as 15 rounds. It is possible to show the game, and it is possible to provide a novel pachinko machine that has never been seen while reducing the monotonous game that simply performs a predetermined game.

In addition, the pachinko machine described above, that is, when the jackpot game is over, without performing the display effect indicating that the jackpot game is over, even in the super speed mode, the display effect during the jackpot game that has been performed so far In a pachinko machine, which is configured to be continuously performed, and when a transition from the super speed mode to the normal speed mode is performed, a display effect indicating that the jackpot game has ended is performed, and the super speed mode ends and the normal speed mode shifts. After that, the gaming state becomes a probability variation time short gaming state in the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, when the jackpot game is over, the display effect indicating that the jackpot game is over is not performed, and even in the super speed mode, the display effect during the jackpot game that has been performed so far is continuously performed, In the case of a pachinko machine that performs a display effect that indicates that the jackpot game is over when the super-high speed mode is switched to the normal speed mode, the probability variation short game is always limited to a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is over. It is not limited to being controlled by the state. In other words, if it is controlled to the super speed mode only for a specified number of times after the jackpot game state has ended (excluding pachinko machines that are controlled to the super speed mode for a number of times long enough to grasp that the jackpot game has ended) Alternatively, it may be controlled to a probability variation short game state until a special lottery is won.

[Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 that protrude outward from both left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. ing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adapted to be inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and is projected from the right side in front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the rear case 3010 in rear view, and the other fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the lock mechanism 3050. By sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion port, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 in which a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 118) are housed, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. It has become.

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 3131 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting opening 2101, and a second starting opening sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting opening 2102. 3132 and the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3133 which detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 are respectively input through the main control I/O port 4100b, the gate sensor 2302, the general winning opening sensor 2123. , The detection signal from the count sensor 2122 and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 may be input via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b. It is like this.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2114 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3040. 2121, and outputs a drive signal to the receiving drive motor 2558, or through the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191, the first special symbol display device 1185, the second special symbol display device 1186, a first special symbol memory display 1184, a second special symbol memory display 1187, a normal symbol display 1189, a normal symbol memory display 1188, a game state display 1183, and outputs a drive signal to the round display 1190 To do.

In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, the gate sensor 2302, and the count sensor 2122. As the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133, contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102, and frequently passes through the gate portion 2301, so the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3131, the second starting port sensor 3132, and the gate sensor 2302. Further, when a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count sensor 2122 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2122 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 2123, 3133 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Described) BC0 is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720. , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation.

[Payout controller]
As shown in FIG. 118, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. ), and a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and also for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 4111e. Is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 with an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED indicator 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is issued via the payout control I/O port 4111b. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance of the payout rotating body 748 to make it difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, Indicates that there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" ( "Electrical connection is cut off in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6", and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are as follows: the ball lending unit board 366, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is issued to the payout control I/O. It is adapted to be received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and also outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number display 365c.

[Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 118, the firing control unit 4120, which performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball forwarding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether the palm or finger touches the handle body 504, and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball according to the player's intention. Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a through the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle main body 504 is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d, based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504, a launch reference pulse. Is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e supplies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay substrate 192 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball sending reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal controller 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 118, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port for outputting drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. Door side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like, and door-side drive light-emission data from a serial I/O port for a frame decoration drive board to a peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is displayed on the liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting from the control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances are played, and the door frame 5 is connected via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external unit”). WDT”) is also provided, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blink command, the game board side lighting blink command, the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used, and in this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting/blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. 5 is output to the LEDs of the respective decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or the lighting signal or flashing signal is output based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. The decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 and the like provided on the game board 4 output to the LEDs. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 has a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body, and a dial drive motor provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 etc. which were provided in the game board 4, each solenoid, etc.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is provided. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal) to the lower speaker 821 for bass sound. Thus, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect).

[Abnormal noise prevention measures]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that requires power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speaker 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It has an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base substrate 194, wirings for connecting various audio equipments, LEDs, sensors and the like to the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, etc. are gathered together and extended backward. It is adapted to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

In addition, at a position (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is arranged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the game area 1100 despite being shot by the hitting ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not arrived to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, a game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only at the periphery even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to the electrostatic induction by this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 that is close to the electrostatic induction may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage occurs). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, a sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), and the sound becomes unpleasant to the player. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set to a large value.

In the embodiment described below, it is detected whether the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-described abnormal audio signal, and when the audio signal is the abnormal audio signal, The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal sound signal blocking board (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, and the like, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the various commands are output. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 118).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and a lower portion provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base board 194, and the like. The speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 are controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played (see FIGS. 118 and 120).

[Abnormal sound signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. 120 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 121 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 120, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by a wiring 196, and the periphery from the door frame base board 194. A +24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal 882 is provided. The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 121, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the +24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the sound signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194. -The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

In addition, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 outputs a woofer+ signal and a woofer signal, which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821 and supplies and outputs them to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

By the way, it is desirable that the location where the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is arranged in the main body frame 3 is less susceptible to the influence of electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, an abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a place far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. In this way, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 at a position where it is unlikely to be affected by static electricity noise, it is possible to stably suppress the input of an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is cut off so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 121, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 outputs from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the sound signal is an abnormal sound signal and outputs an abnormal sound detection signal. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal is provided.

The +24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the +24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. The ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

The woofer+signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884, one is input to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer+signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

A woofer signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit in which four diodes SD1 to SD4 are connected in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, arranged in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit. It is mainly configured by an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the woofer + signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 that supplies the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the latter stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the latter stage of the rectification bridge. The 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose voltage is substantially 0V is connected by cutting the minus part by the circuit.

Then, in the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the + voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the +voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the +voltage line 890. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the +voltage waveform is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at a stage subsequent to the connection point of the capacitor SC2 on the + voltage line 890, and the smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the +voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on when the transistor STR2 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the eighth terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer+signal line 888, and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts) is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer+signal. Through an external lower speaker 821.

Further, a varistor SZNR1 for bypassing an induced current by self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the 5th of the relay SRL1 is connected. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 to the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895. It is like this.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal voice signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer+ signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, In FIG. 121, current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the +voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the upper side to the lower side in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 121 to reach the peak voltage of 0V from the +voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

In this way, when a normal audio signal (waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also remain in the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not practically turn on.

<Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, so that the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the non-excited state, and the B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is inoperative (the contact is closed), and the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are inoperative. It is the A contact (the state where the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal is input for a certain period of time] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage of +24V, +18V, +1.5V, etc.) with a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode SD2 and the diode are provided in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. SD3 becomes conductive, a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 in FIG. 121, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the increase in the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is not applied. This approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4) , A resistor SR5, a Zener diode SZD1, a resistor SR6, and a resistor SR7, a current flows, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is pulled down to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the first terminal and the second terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in an excited state, and the B contact between the terminals 5 and 6 of the relay SRL1 is in the operating state (contact is open), and the connection between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal is in the operating state. It becomes A contact (contact closed). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Moreover, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to a conductive state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay that is connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows in the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The current is passed to the flowing conductive state, and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 of the woofer+ signal remains blocked.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs the abnormality detection signal (photo coupler). Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormal sound detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the coil S1 of the relay SRL1 is maintained in the energized state, and the output of the woofer+ signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal voice signal can be grasped by the staff or the output stop state of the voice is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to a normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an audio signal is extremely amplified and an excessive AC voltage exceeding an appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are turned on, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 121, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. To be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal. A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 to rapidly charge the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be briefly described.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated, and the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are cut off. Then, the output of the woofer+signal on the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal sound from being generated due to an abnormal sound signal of an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 118, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 118, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in this character ROM 4150d.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral controller 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the first. The drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the left-right direction is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d is large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is large, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit in the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when various people are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device are set such that these sprites are arranged in a position on the screen or a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”). 3252.

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 characters arranged in a horizontal 2×vertical 3 manner can be used. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 have main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front thereof, and a main scan that intersects the one direction. The sub-scanning is performed by repeatedly performing the main scanning in the direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 moves from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. Sequentially output to pixels for one line. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly when the drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is drawn. Based on the drawing data of one minute, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels of one line as main scanning from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Control processing in main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 131. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the starting mouth winning process. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

[About main processing]
In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 122, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU are set (normal initial settings), according to the backup data stored in the RAM. , Interrupt timing, etc.).

When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 4100c for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, in the power-on process, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 to be transmittable when the normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress status of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (eg, when the power is turned off) when the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored. When the supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for games. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the power supply board stops supplying the power supply voltage to the main control board 4100. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

This power failure occurrence process is performed when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start from. Although the processing contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence process is not an interrupt process but a branch process executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of a power failure notice signal detection. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About processing at power failure]
Next, as shown in FIG. 123, the power failure occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure advance notice signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained when the power is restored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the processing at the time of power failure occurs in the backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for power supply stop. In addition, in this process, when the power supply interruption process is started because the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is entered due to the instantaneous power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on after a predetermined period has elapsed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during execution of the main processing, and as shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the process of saving the registers (step S10), and then executes the processes of step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-mentioned switches (gate switch, starting opening sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number updating process 2 may be updated in the random number updating process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set to the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control processing of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, by the attacker solenoid 2121). The opening/closing member 2106 for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103 is controlled to execute a process of changing the open/closed state of the special winning opening 2103.

In step S15, the normal control process including the lottery process for winning the normal win that triggers the operation of the movable piece 2305 is executed. In this normal control processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2305 becomes higher if a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Is configured to execute (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, while shortening the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, this is set to a long time as the operating time when the movable piece 2305 operates. By doing so, a time saving state is realized in which it is easier to accept the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 than in the normal state (non-time saving state).

In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer or the like), a drive signal is output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown). Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control unit 4140 is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, jackpot determination random numbers used in the determination of whether to generate a jackpot gaming state (also called jackpot determination, jackpot lottery), jackpot gaming state in jackpot determination Random jackpot symbols used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be generated, whether to perform high-expectation production such as reach production when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the jackpot drawing (miss) Reach determination random number used for determination of whether or not (reach determination), the variable display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern (variation time etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol displays 1185, 1186 (Random time random number), a round determination random number used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the special winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game (special bonus game), a pair of movable opening and closing the second starting opening 2102 There is a random number for ordinary win determination, which is used to determine whether to control the piece 2105 in the open state (normal lottery win determination).

In addition, the jackpot symbol random number is also used for a determination regarding a jackpot state type (whether or not to activate the probability variation function or the time saving function) performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, whether or not to control the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the round determination random number, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 which are related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, in the open state. Update the related random number per symbol. That is, the random numbers used for determining whether the jackpot gaming state occurs and whether to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 in the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the probability (probability of determining to generate the jackpot gaming state, probability of determining to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to be in the open state) constant for each random number in a predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the jackpot gaming state is generated, and the reach determination random number not related to the ordinary lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

Although not shown in FIG. 124, in the timer interrupt process, the receiving unit 2550 (more specifically, the movable valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the movable shaft 2552) is rotated regardless of the game state. A drive control process for the acceptance drive motor 2558 is also performed.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, a first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first/second starting opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102. Then, after the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed, the process corresponding to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

More specifically, when the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is completed, it is first determined whether or not the process flag is 0 (step S120), and if the process flag is 0 ( If YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), the process flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery for the big hit or the like. ..

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186 (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device) In any of 1186, the processing flag is updated to "2" after the variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display is determined).

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special special display device 1185 or the second special design display device 1186 is special based on the time-out. Stop the variable display of symbols. After that, when it is determined in the variation start process (step S130) that the jackpot is won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost to the jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is performed again.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to perform processing for determining the aspect of the jackpot game and the determined jackpot game aspect (for example, the number of rounds. ) Is set, and the accessory continuous operation device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, and the processing flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

If the process flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), the process flag is 4 and the jackpot game process (step S210) is executed. In this jackpot game process, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled based on the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607). When the jackpot game is over, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is performed again.

In this way, the special control process ends when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, and step S210 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag.

[Regarding the first and second starting mouth prize processing]
Next, the first/second starting mouth winning process (process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of the first/second starting mouth winning process.

In the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110), roughly, a process of determining whether or not a game ball is won in the first starting port 2101 or the second starting port 2102, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there is, a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the processing of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and are provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the second start pending storage process (step S203), various data obtained by the game ball winning the second starting opening 2102 (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol for Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the holding history update processing (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second holding number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that there is a winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) is set, and The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the second starting opening 2102 side, it can be promptly updated through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value is 4, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 (YES in step S205), and Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the first start pending storage process (step S207), various data obtained by winning the game ball in the first start opening 2101 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol random number) Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the holding history update processing (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM.

Even in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that there is a winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and The winning notification command that has been set may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, the peripheral control unit 4140 can control the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like to promptly update the pending display on the side of the first starting opening 2101 through the control.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processing is ended at this point.

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting opening 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting opening 2101 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, a mode in which the winning process for the second starting port 2102 is executed after the winning process for the first starting port 2101 may be executed.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may perform a leading determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may send a command indicating the result of the leading determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, the probability variation lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern described below), and the process of previously determining the lottery result Is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The leading determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance determination process, the random number and the advance determination table are compared to determine a lottery result (a big hit, a big hit type, a variation display pattern, etc.) when a lottery is performed using the random number. (The determination performed in advance of the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect that reflects the received winning notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "prefetching". Also referred to as "staging").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start process.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol displays 1185 and 1186 (first start storage). It is determined whether both the number and the second starting memory number are "0" (step S301). Here, with the value in the two reservation number counters corresponding to the special symbol display 1185, 1186, the storage area for the first starting memory and the second starting memory (disturbance stored in the special symbol reservation storage means 4214, 4224) Therefore, in this step S301, if the value of each of the pending number counters is “0” (YES), the variation process of the first special symbol and the variation process of the second special symbol are performed. When it is determined that none of the starting conditions is satisfied, and the processing flag is updated to "1" as the processing of step S318, the fluctuation start processing is ended.

On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), it is determined that the starting condition is satisfied, and execution of the jackpot lottery that is in the suspended state. In order to update the order of the above, the shift processing in the special symbol holding storage means 4214, 4224 is performed (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, each of the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 is provided with four storage areas. In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area that stores jackpot determination random numbers, and a jackpot symbol random number storage that stores jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, and the like. Regions and are respectively provided.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in these storage means 4214 and 4224 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the game is played. There is no difference in the expected value of profit (number of award balls that can be acquired, etc.) given to a player.

In the shift process in the random number storage area (steps S302 to S310), the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol is always postponed, and the lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) based on the winning of the second starting opening 2102 is performed. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 are operated so that they are all digested first.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol display device 1186 which is the side that is preferentially consumed. It is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to is 0, that is, whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage unit 4224. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 (NO in step S302), the random number related to the second special symbol is read out from the storage area and this is used. It is acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, random numbers for reach determination, random display pattern random numbers) are, of course, processes related to lottery for jackpots, as well as fluctuation patterns of special symbols (variation Time, stop display mode, etc.), processing for setting the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing member 2106, processing for setting the gaming state, etc. The second starting game that is triggered by the winning of the ball can be progressed.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates various random numbers stored in each n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area in order to update the digestion order of the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, n- Each is shifted to the first storage area (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area becomes vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy has occurred.

Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second starting game) is shown to be in a state of being advanced (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1187 so that the number of holdings for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol memory display 1187. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0" after the variation start process is completed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127, in the processing of step S302, when it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 (YES in step S302), A random number related to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area of the one special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and is acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out are not only the processing for the lottery for the big hit, but also the processing for setting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the processing for setting the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing member 2106, and the setting of the game state. By being subjected to the processing related to, etc., the first starting game triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 can be progressed.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates various random numbers stored in each n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area in order to update the digestion order for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, n- Each is shifted to the first storage area (step S308). As a result, at least a storage area becomes vacant, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the vacant storage area.

Then, after this, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is shown to be in a state of progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S310). Further, at this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1184 so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 1184. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way is similarly reset after the variation start process is completed, for example, when the process flag is updated to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312), and if it is not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation function is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table in which the probability of being a jackpot is set to be low is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot is determined. Select a table that is set high. In this example, the probability of being a big hit is set to 1/320 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, the normal time), and the probability of being a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, the high probability). It is set to /320.

In the processing of step S313 or step S314, after any table is selected, the jackpot determination random number regarding any special symbol obtained in the processing of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315). Then, if the jackpot value (YES in step S315), based on the jackpot symbol random number relating to any of the special symbols, which is also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307, the jackpot, the probability It is determined whether or not it is of a type (state type relating to a game state) that activates the variable function or the time saving function (step S316). As a result, the flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in the process of step S316 is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318. The jackpot symbol random number is, for example, a random number from 0 to 9, and when the jackpot symbol random number acquired from these is 7, for example, the jackpot flag of the specific type is turned on in step S317.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, as described above as the jackpot symbol random number, for example, in the random number range of 0-299. A random number value to be generated is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the obtained random number value is subjected to a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type that activates the probability varying function or the time saving function in the process of step S316.

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set on the basis of the result of the lottery (step S315) for winning or losing the jackpot will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 128, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), the jackpot variation pattern table setting process described below is performed so that the variation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. Perform (step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not "ON" in the process of step S401, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed, as the process of step S403. As a result, if it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in step S403), the reach-miss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern of the reach effect is set although it is a loss (step S404). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the reach effect is not performed, as the process of step S405, the non-reach lose variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the lose effect is performed without performing the reach effect. I do.

The table set in the non-reach lost variation pattern table setting process is prepared in such a manner that it is associated with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. At certain times, shortening fluctuations are being made.

Then, when the selection table relating to the variation pattern is set in the processing of any of step S402, step S404, and step S405, the main control MPU 4100a then performs the processing of step S410 as the set selection table. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on. Next, as the process of step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as an effect command, and the winning information command (such as a big win) is set.

Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the processing of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol The variable display of the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the display device 1186 is started. Then, after that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing ends.

By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 124 as the effect command set in the process of step S411. .. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command under the control of the peripheral control unit 4140. The display production will be performed.

[About changing process]
Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the mid-fluctuation process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a firstly, as the process of step S501, the variation time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 128). Will determine if the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S501), the fluctuation process is ended.

If the variable time set in the timer is up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to OFF, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol The variable display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the display device 1186 is finished. Further, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performing the display effect for the jackpot lottery, the confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be fixedly displayed is given to the peripheral control unit 4140 so as to end the display effect. Is set (step S503). The confirmation stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the same display effect is definitely displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" because it is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been variably stopped to indicate that the jackpot is won (step S505). , The process during the change ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not ON and is a losing hit to the jackpot (NO in step S504), the processing flag is determined to be in the processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot is hit. Is updated to "0" (step S508), and the changing process is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol will be performed on condition that it is held and consumed in the process of step S130.

[About the jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing (step S200) executed when the processing flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

As shown in FIG. 130, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first starts the operation of the condition device as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game (step S604). .. When the time saving function is operating (YES in step S605), the operation of the time saving function is stopped based on the start of the operation of the conditional device (step S606). When it is determined in step S605 that the time saving function is not operating (NO in step S605), step S606 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, it is determined whether the jackpot game to be executed this time is a jackpot (per the first special map) as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game balls into the first starting opening 2101. R. When it is determined in step S607 that it is the first special map (YES in step S607), the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time per round (for example, 30 seconds), and the first special winning opening 2103, The maximum winning number (for example, 9 balls) is set (step S608).

If it is determined in step S607 that the second special map is not hit (NO in step S607), the jackpot game executed this time is the result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102. Is a big hit (per second special map) or not (step S609). When it is determined in step S609 that the second special map is hit (YES in step S609), the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), the maximum opening time per round (for example, 30 sec), and the second special winning opening 2153 and The maximum winning number (for example, 9 balls) is set (step S610). Then, after that, the process proceeds to step S611, the process flag is updated to "4", and the jackpot game start process is ended.

[About the jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the jackpot game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a first, as the process of step S801, the jackpot prize corresponding to the present jackpot game (first jackpot 2103 or It is determined whether or not the two major winning openings 2153) are open. When the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 are open (YES in step S801), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 is determined as the process of step S802. It is determined whether or not the opening/closing operation time limit set in the processing of step S608 or step S610 (see FIG. 130) has been reached. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the opening/closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S802), the opening/closing members 2106 and 2156 are closed to close the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 (step). S804).

However, even when it is determined in the process of step S802 that the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 are opened. After that, the number of game balls entering the opened special winning openings 2103 and 2153 is equal to or more than the upper limit number (for example, 9) set in the processing of step S608 or step S610 (see FIG. 130). If it is (YES in step S803), the process proceeds to step S804, and the open special winning openings 2103 and 2153 are closed. On the other hand, the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), and the number of game balls entering the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 has not reached the upper limit. If not (NO in step S803), the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 are kept open until the condition of step S802 or step S803 is satisfied. Then, when the condition of step S802 or step S803 is satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S801, when it is determined that none of the special winning openings 2103 is open, the number of times the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 are opened (the number of round games) is the same as in step S608. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in the process of step S610 (see FIG. 130) has been reached (step S805). When it has not arrived (NO in step S805), the corresponding opening/closing members 2106 and 2156 are operated to open the corresponding special winning openings 2103 and 2153 (step S806), and the jackpot game process is ended. ..

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of rounds, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, so that a big hit (a hit with the operation of the condition device) ), the operation of the opening/closing members 2106 and 2156 (big hit game) performed on the condition that the player has won the prize) is entered. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of steps S807 to S812, and thereby the jackpot jackpot execution trigger of the jackpot game stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Based on the winning type, after setting the game state after the jackpot game, the jackpot game process is ended. Note that the winning species here refers to whether or not it is a winning species that activates the probability varying function and the time saving function.

In the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of rounds (YES in step S805), first, the jackpot flag and the jackpot playing flag are each turned off ( Step S807). Then, after that, the probability varying function is activated (step S809) and the time saving function is activated (step S810), and then the process proceeds to step S811. Step S811 is a process of stopping the operation of the condition device. When the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S811), when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S812), the jackpot game process is ended.

According to such a jackpot game process, until the round game is judged to have reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step 805, the corresponding jackpot 2103, 2153 is opened according to the type of jackpot. The modes (step S802, step S803, step S805) are repeatedly opened, and eventually the player can obtain prize balls according to the type of jackpot.

[Regular control processing]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an example of the normal control process (step S15).

Now, in the processing of step S901, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2301, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S902, the main control MPU 4100a first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of a normal symbol from a random number counter and storing it in a normal symbol reservation storage area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S903).
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S904) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the ordinary symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process to wait until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 is stopped (step S905)
4. Ordinary symbol variation control is stopped based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped so that the normal symbol variation display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189. Normal symbol stop processing to be performed (step S906)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the movable piece 2305 is slid to the back side to the second starting opening 2102 of the game ball. Ordinary electric accessory release process (step S907) for executing a process for controlling acceptance

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S903) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control internal RAM 4100e.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate portion passing process (step S902).

Now, in the processing of step S901, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2301, as shown in FIG. 133, the main control board 4100 As the process of step S911, the main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S911, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbols to be reserved is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S912 to S914 is performed in order to newly place the variable display control of the ordinary symbols in a newly suspended state. Will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S912, the ordinary holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S913, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S914, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the process of step S911, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S912 to S914, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S903).

When the normal control flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 134, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as the process of step S921, the normal reserved number counter. Based on the counter value by, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S922, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode (eg, ordinary random number, universal figure fluctuation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S923 and S924, the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a while counting down the normal suspension number counter Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) related to are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with passage of a game ball to the gate unit 2301 in order from the first (first) area. To do. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2301, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols is held is stored so that it can be specified, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current game state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, probability variation time shortening game state) (step S926), a time saving time universal figure determination table (not shown) Is selected (step S926), and the current game state is the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S925), the non-time saving general figure hit determination table (not shown) Is selected (step S927), and the selected ordinary-drawing hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S922 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S928).

In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the ordinary figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is a short working hour (low probability short working state and probability variation short working state), The gaming state is provided with a non-time saving general-purpose hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the general-purpose per-judgment determination table for time saving, which is referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers coincide with the per-universal-university determination value indicating that the ordinary random numbers are won, The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the player always wins the game, and the movable piece 2305 is slid to the back side to the second start opening 2102. The acceptance is controlled to be possible.

Further, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to in order to compare with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers may match with the general-university figure determination value indicating that each common figure is won. Instead, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to agree with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. In this way, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, since it is not won per common figure, the movable piece 2305 is slid backward and the second starting opening 2102 is provided. There is no possibility of controlling the acceptance of the game ball into the game. However, as described above, the winning of the ordinary symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is won. When the movable piece 2305 of the second starting opening 2102 is retracted for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting opening 2102, and then slide to the front side again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2102.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected ordinary figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and determines that it is an ordinary figure hit (step S929) After setting the per-universal-play flag indicating that the variation is won per per-universal design (step S930), the per-universal-universal design as a mode when the variation control of the normal design is stopped (normal design stop design) Is determined (step S931), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S922 of the ordinary symbol normal process, if it is determined that it is out, the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is performed. An out-of-general symbol as a mode at the time of stop (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S932). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S904) (step S933), this process ends.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 135, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initialization process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms has elapsed when 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady processing, processing for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps/LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1106. In the command analysis processing of step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1102, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by setting the variation pattern (step S411).

Also, in the sound control processing of step S1103, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S1104, a control process related to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 3041 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S1106, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S1101 to S1106 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, immediately after the 16 ms steady process is started, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning (command of step S1101). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1102 that the 16 ms elapse flag has been set after completion of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated by either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

[Game contents]
The game contents in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration relating to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119 and the like. Note that the functional configuration related to the payout of gaming balls is omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls and effect controls are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a detection signal of a game ball is input from the gate sensor 2302 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number which is a lottery result for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. Normal symbol reserve storage means 4202 to temporarily store according to the condition of, and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number executed on the normal symbol reserve storage means 4202, ROM of the main control board 4100 Normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in, and a normal symbol display control means for varying and displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206, when the normal random number (ordinary lottery result) displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 by the normal symbol display control means 4206 is “normal hit”, the starting opening solenoid 2114 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105. The starting opening opening and closing control means 4208, and the normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying on the normal symbol storage display 1188 the number of ordinary symbol random numbers reserved and stored in the normal symbol suspension storage means 4202 as the stored number. There is.

The above-mentioned normal symbol hold storage means 4202 is a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2302 as a trigger while the normal symbol is being displayed by the normal symbol display control means 4206. ), the execution of the stored ordinary random number is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbol becomes possible.

Further, on the main control board 4100, based on the detection signal detected by the first starting opening sensor 3131 by the starting winning into the first starting opening 2101, a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol is obtained. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number, and a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to predetermined conditions, The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored on the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and executed, the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 First special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4216 selected from the table, and the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4216 First special symbol display control means 4218 to be variably displayed, and the first special symbol storage display 1184 to be displayed as the number of the first special random numbers reserved and stored in the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 as the stored number. A symbol memory number display control means 4220 is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 119, the main control board 4100 is further provided with a first jackpot symbol random number generating means and a second jackpot symbol random number generating means. When the first special lottery result is a big hit, the random number generated by the first big hit symbol random number generating means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined. Similarly, when the second special lottery result is a big hit, the random number generated by the second big hit symbol random number generating means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined.

Further, on the main control board 4100, based on the detection signal detected by the second starting opening sensor 3132 by the starting winning into the second starting opening 2102, a second predetermined special lottery result for the second special symbol is obtained. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, and a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition, The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number stored on the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 and executed, the predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 Based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4226 and the second special symbol variation pattern selecting means 4226 selected from the table, the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 1186. The second special symbol display control means 4228 to be variably displayed, and the second special symbol storage indicator 1187 to be displayed as the number of the second special random numbers reserved and stored by the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 as the stored number. It is provided with a symbol memory number display control means 4230.

These first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, the first and second special symbol display control means 4218, 4228 newly and special symbols such as the first and second special symbols are variably displayed. When it is not possible to variably display, the first special random number and the second special random number triggered by the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3131 and the second starting port sensor 3132, respectively, are each a predetermined number (for example, four each). ) Is stored, and execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until variable display of special symbols becomes possible.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number retained by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224, start prizes to the starting ports 2101 and 2102. It is provided with a priority holding digestion means 4231 that preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number rather than timing, and the priority holding digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The holding of the lottery result is given priority (execution).

Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. An advantageous game state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous based on the special lottery result), and an opening/closing member 2106 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous game state generating means 4232. It is provided with a special winning opening opening/closing control means 4234 for controlling the drive of the attacker solenoid 2121 so as to open/close in a predetermined pattern.

Further, on the main control board 4100, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern and second special symbol variation pattern) in which the advantageous game state is generated by the advantageous game state generation means 4232, It further comprises a fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 is changed to, for example, a variation pattern table (for example, a high-probability variation pattern table) in which a variation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal variation pattern table ( So-called, probability change), change to a change pattern table (for example, a time-shortening change pattern table) where the change time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shorter than the normal change pattern table (so-called, time saving), There is a higher probability that an advantageous game state occurs than usual, and the change pattern table (for example, the probability variation short time variation pattern table) with a short variation time of the special symbol is changed (so-called, probability variation/time reduction).

Furthermore, in the main control board 4100, a normal random number, a first special random number, a second special random number, a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol storage, Based on the second special symbol storage and the like, command generating means 4238 for generating a command for predetermined control such as effect command, and command transmitting means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generating means 4238 to the peripheral control section 4140. It has and.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are transparent. The game is started by being driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the contact of the game balls with the obstacle nails causes the flow of the game balls. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side of the highest part in the peripheral wall part 2503 of the center character 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails or inclined upper surfaces of the peripheral wall part 2503 cause the center to move. It is guided to the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Further, when the game ball hit on the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2503 of the center character 2500, it is guided to the gate part 2301.

Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302, based on the detection signal, the main In the control board 4100, the ordinary random number generation means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as the ordinary lottery result. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the ordinary symbol display device 1189 consisting of one LED is alternately emitted in red, green, and orange), A normal symbol based on a normal random number (ordinary lottery result) that is extracted after a predetermined time (for example, an extremely short time such as 0.08 seconds) elapses and is stopped (ordinary symbol display device 1189 emits either red or green) R. The variation display of this normal symbol is designed to be performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

By the way, in this example, while the normal symbol display is normally displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302, the normal symbol which is changing is stopped and is normally generated/extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol holding storage means 4202, and the display is displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as a held number) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 is discarded.

In addition, the game ball which is driven into the game area 1100 and flows down the left side of the center role object 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center role object 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200. It is designed to be used. Then, when the game balls are won in the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the starting openings 2101, 1022, the big winning openings 2103, 2153 arranged below the center accessory 2500, and the winnings are detected by various sensors, Based on the detection signal, the main control board 4100 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command. A number of game balls according to the winning destination is paid out to the upper plate 301.

In addition, the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is any of the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first big winning opening 2103, and the second big winning opening 2153. When no prize is won, the game area 1100 is discharged downward from the rear side of the game board 4 through the out port 1151 provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. In addition, regardless of which of the general winning openings 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first big winning opening 2103 and the second big winning opening 2153, the winning game ball has won. Are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned to the game area 1100.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 is designed to be directly controlled by the main control board 4100. On the other hand (see FIG. 119), the variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It is controlled by the unit 4150. As a result, the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like control the variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like that the player pays particular attention to. It is possible to prepare a plurality of variation patterns of symbols for one command in advance and increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Further, the "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing in the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and not getting bored. Has become.

Further, one of the purposes of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is to increase the number of game balls that can be obtained in one big hit game more than ever (2000 pieces). There may be a case where the jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out is provided with loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate. However, for example, in a gaming state in which the player can execute a game under conditions that are advantageous to the player who operates both the probability variation function and the time saving function, the payout that can be paid out per unit time There is a concern that the performance will become excessive, and as a result, the interest in the game will increase too much, and that the burden on the hall side will become excessive.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in the probability variation short game state, the second special symbol by facilitating the acceptance of the game medium to the second starting opening 2102 rather than the first starting opening 2101. While promoting the lottery process on the side, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state (less than twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state. However, the probability value that is generally considered to be low (for example, less than 1/100) is adopted. More specifically, in the lottery process for the first special symbol, even if the jackpot is won, even though the expected value of less than 500 pieces is paid out, the low probability state and the high probability state In each of the above cases, only a low jackpot probability of about "1/200" that is unfit for paying out such a quantity is adopted. In addition, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, in both the low probability state and the high probability state, the low jackpot probability that is the same as the first special symbol side (a low jackpot probability of around "1/200") ) Is adopted. According to such a configuration, even when the loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate of 50% exceeds the jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out, Excessive payout performance that can be paid out per unit time can be avoided.

However, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state (less than twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state), and is generally low. If the probability value (eg, less than one-hundredth) used as a probability is simply adopted, an excessive delay may occur in the game or the effect in the advantageous game state, which causes the game. There is a concern that the interest will decline. However, in the conventional gaming machine, even when there is a period (time saving state) in which the control for facilitating the acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening is executed (the time saving state), the identification is made every time the game ball enters the starting opening. In many cases, the probability of entering the starting opening was not set so high in order to avoid the prize balls being overpaid. That is, in this case, when the probability of jackpot is set to a low probability value of the same degree in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the game speed in the probability variation short game state. Then, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of an excessive delay in the game or the effect in the advantageous game state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, at the time when any one of the game balls that has been driven into the game area 1100 but was not accepted by the second starting opening 2102 occurs, the game is played. The payout of the specific prize ball each time the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2102 is set to "1" so that the total amount of the specific prize balls does not exceed the total amount of the game balls hit in the area 1100. Suppression control is to be performed.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to prevent the total amount of the starting prize balls paid out each time the second starting opening 2102 is received (to the second starting opening 2102). No matter how high the probability of entering a game ball, the player's possession ball will not increase by paying out according to that ball). Therefore, even in a time saving state (probably variable time saving game state, etc.), it is possible to increase the probability of accepting a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 without considering such a balance with a specific prize ball. become. And due to such a high acceptance probability, in a short time state (probably variable time short game state, etc.), the game balls are often accepted one after another in succession, thereby increasing the game speed (changing the variation time more Short).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to achieve a dramatic improvement in the probability of accepting a game ball into the second starting opening 2102 when in a time saving state (probably variable time saving game state, etc.), The second starting opening 2102 is arranged in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Then, when the game balls are continuously driven into the area on the right side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, all of these game balls are fired at intervals of each other (0.6 seconds). It is decided to adopt a flow-down structure that is sequentially guided to the gate unit 2300 while maintaining the above.

That is, in the gate unit 2300 according to this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301 in the unit 2300 is placed in the second starting opening 2102 in which the movable piece 2305 is movable according to the passage. In order to be able to win a prize through the passage from the gate portion 2301 to the second starting port 2102, the following features are provided.

First, when the gate sensor 2302 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2301, the main control board 4100 acquires an ordinary random number based on the information indicating that the detection has been performed, and the acquisition is thus performed. A judgment (ordinary judgment) as to whether or not an ordinary hit is obtained is made based on an ordinary random number. In addition, the main control board 4100 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 for a predetermined time based on the result of the normal determination. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the normal hit is obtained in the normal determination (when a specific stop display mode appears as a result of variably displaying the normal symbol for a predetermined time), the main control board 4100 (2) The movable piece 2305 is controlled to slide inward so that the starting port 2102 is opened.

In this regard, the guide passage having a predetermined length in the gate unit 2300 requires a substantially uniform time for the game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 due to the structure integrally formed in the unit 2300. , And is always guided to a region (the movable region of the movable piece 2305) that can be received in the second starting port 2102. On the other hand, in the time saving state (a game state in which the so-called opening extension function operates), until the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301 reaches the second starting opening 2102 (while a substantially uniform time elapses). The main control board 4100 executes the above-mentioned normal determination, normal symbol variation display, and drive control for moving the movable piece 2305 to the open state, so that a normal hit is obtained and the game passes through the gate portion 2301. The sphere itself is made receivable in the second starting port 2102.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to this embodiment, in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is always "0.08 seconds", and the symbol of the normal symbol is fixedly displayed. The time from when the movable piece 2305 is opened to the open state is "0.008 seconds", and the time when the movable piece 2305 is maintained in the open state is "5.5 seconds". The time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2305 is changed from the open state to the closed state until the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302) is "0.05 seconds". ing.

On the other hand, in the gate unit 2300 according to the present embodiment, the time “0” from when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 (after the normal symbol starts changing) to when the movable piece 2305 is opened. By taking only 0.088 seconds” (or a time “0.1 seconds” to which a slight margin time (for example, “12 ms” is added)) to reach the second starting opening 2102, the unit concerned This time is secured while the size of the 2120 is reduced.

As a result, when the winning is obtained in the ordinary lottery in the time saving state, the gaming ball itself which is the cause of the winning by passing through the gate portion 2301 is the guide route in the gate unit 2300. Through the movable portion 2305 which has been opened by the movable piece 2305, and is received by the second starting port 2102. Since such an open state is continued for a long time of "5.5 seconds", a game ball is 0.6 seconds in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. When the game balls are launched at intervals (100 game balls are sequentially launched at a constant interval per minute), those game balls are launched to the second starting opening 2102 via the guide passage member and the gate unit 2300. It becomes possible to be accepted one after another while keeping the interval (0.6 second interval).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to the present embodiment, in the super fast mode in the probability variation short game state, the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance into the second starting opening 2102 is performed. If the gap is obtained, the symbol control period (addition time of the variation time of the symbol and the stop time of the symbol) until the variable display control of the next second special symbol that has been held is started first Since it is set as described in (see paragraph 0694), even if the game balls launched at 0.6 second intervals are successively received in the second starting opening 2102, those game balls are randomly selected. We are trying to prevent the waste from being discharged without being treated.

The symbol control period in the variable display control of the second special symbol in the super speed mode may be set as follows, unlike the setting (paragraph 0694) described above.
(B) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "1", the suspension is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number held at this point is "0"), if a loss is obtained, four game balls are started as the second variation time. While "2.4 seconds" that can be accepted by the mouth 2102 is set, "0.1 seconds" is set as the stop time of the symbol thereafter (time to be fixedly stopped).
(B) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "2", the suspension is released ( As a result of lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "1"), if a loss is obtained, three game balls are started as the second variation time. "1.8 seconds" is set as much as can be accepted in the mouth 2102, and "0.2 seconds" is set as the subsequent stop time of the symbol.
(C) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "3", the suspension is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number held at this point is "2"), if a loss is obtained, as a variable time, when added to the symbol stop time, "0.101 seconds" is set so that the two game balls can be received in the second starting port 2102, and "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbols.
(D) When the number of the variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol which is in the state of suspension (the number of second special symbol suspension) is "4", the suspension is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol being performed based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "3"), if a loss is obtained, it is launched at an interval of 0.6 seconds as a variation time. Even when the next game ball is continuously received in the second starting port 2102, the timing of this reception is set to "0.099 seconds" which can be set to come after the symbol variation ends. At the same time, "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbols.

That is, according to this setting example, if a loss is obtained when the number of reserved second special symbols is "1", "2", in order to make the number of reserved second special symbols the maximum number. At least the required time is set as the variable time (configuration (a), (b)). Therefore, while the second special symbol is fluctuating, as many game balls as necessary to maximize the number of holdings will be accepted, and thus basically the number of holdings is maximized. Will be able to be played. On the other hand, if a loss is obtained when the number of second special symbols reserved is "3", "4", the next symbol variation that is in the state of suspension by the game suspension means is started. Until (pending is released) until the symbol control period (0.601 seconds, 0.599 seconds), in the symbol control period, a relatively short time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) The variable state is terminated by the control, and the control is performed so that the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of losing for a relatively long time (0.5 seconds) thereafter (configuration (c), (ni. )). In particular, according to the above configuration (d), when a loss is obtained as a result of the lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2102, the interval between the game balls is set to 0.6. Since the symbol variation is completed only in the time less than second, even when the next game ball launched at an interval of 0.6 seconds is continuously received in the second starting opening 2102, the timing of this reception is It comes after the fluctuation of the design ends. That is, in this case, in the probability variation short game state in which the game balls can be successively received in the second starting opening 2102, each time the game balls are received, with a low jackpot probability as in the low probability state. However, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another. As a result, in the probability variation short game state, a certain long time can be digested by a good tempo game using a game ball that is launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds and symbol fluctuation (production etc.), As a result, even when the loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate that exceeds 50% of the jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls can be paid out is provided, the interest in the game is appropriate. Will be maintained at the level.

However, as a more specific effect when in such a probability variation short game state, as will be described later, each time a symbol variation is performed, a lost symbol does not appear to be large, etc. One big production that spans over (for example, one production animation is played by using the time for a plurality of symbol variations) is displayed so that a certain long time is consumed. Is important in maintaining an appropriate level.

Further, according to this setting example, in the symbol control (the number of second special symbols to be reserved is "3", "4") at the time of loss when in the super-speed mode of the probability variation short game state, in the symbol control period While ending the fluctuation state in a comparatively short time, for a comparatively long time after this, the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of losing (the fixed stop time is longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol). In this way, the symbol display is maintained for a long time in the stopped state at the time of losing even though it is in the symbol control period, and the lost symbol is as if waiting for the acceptance of a new game ball. It often happens that the game ball is accepted when the game is stopped. Therefore, even when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 when the number of reserves is maximum (when the game ball is discharged without being used for the lottery process), It becomes possible to make the game balls appear to be used in the lottery process.

Further, according to this setting example, in particular, in the symbol control at the time of losing in the super-speed mode of the probability variation short game state (the number of second special symbols held is "3", "4"), the game ball is launched. By ending the symbol variation only in the time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) less than the interval (0.6 seconds), the next game ball that is launched at the interval of 0.6 seconds is in the second starting opening 2102. Even in the case of continuous acceptance, the timing of acceptance is set to come after the symbol variation ends. Therefore, even when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 when the number of reserves is maximum (when the game ball is discharged without being used for the lottery process), It becomes possible to make the game balls appear to be used in the lottery process. In addition, in the symbol variation at the time of losing the second special symbol in the time saving state (probability variation time saving game state or the like), the effect accompanied by the reach is not performed (or is difficult to perform) as described above. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost, basically the second special symbol and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol are derived and displayed immediately.

Furthermore, according to this setting example, when the maximum number of the second special symbols to be held is "4", until the next symbol variation that is in the held state is started (the hold is released. Until)), the symbol control period is a time (0.599 seconds) that is less than the interval between firing game balls (0.6 seconds). Therefore, when the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum number, even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds are successively received in the second starting opening 2102, those game balls are It is possible to suppress the situation where the lottery process is discharged without being used. Also, when the number of second special symbols held drops from the maximum number to "3", until the next symbol fluctuation that is in the held state is started (until the hold is released) Since the control period is a time (0.601 seconds) which is slightly longer than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds), it suppresses the generation of game balls that are discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. Meanwhile, it becomes possible to make the number of holding of the second special symbol the maximum number.

Moreover, while allowing the symbol fluctuation to be repeatedly performed at the fastest speed (speed each time a game ball is entered), it is also made unlikely that the symbol fluctuation will be interrupted, This also suppresses the decline in the entertainment appeal.

In addition, during the symbol control period until the next symbol fluctuation that is in the hold state is started (until the hold is released), the stop time of the symbol does not depend on the number of second special symbols reserved. Alternatively, it may be set at a fixed time (for example, "0.5 seconds").

According to the second unit 2120 having such a structure, in the time saving state (probably variable time shortening game state, etc.), each time the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, those game balls remain in the second starting opening 2102. Since it is possible to be accepted, all the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 can be involved in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the winning in the second starting opening 2102. As a result, even when the jackpot probability is set to the same low probability value in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, in the short-time state (probably variable time-short game state, etc.) Not only will you be able to generate the next big hit game in a reasonable time that is slightly longer, but also with a sense of speed at least until you hit the big hit just by hitting the game ball A game with a small number of balls (balls not used in the lottery) will be realized.

Further, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, based on the command related to the lottery result, the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are provided. Etc., and appropriately actuating each solenoid and the like, each decorative board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, provided with the game board 4 The LEDs mounted on the 3690, 3692, etc. are made to emit light as appropriate, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

Next, an example of the effect in the above-mentioned super speed mode in the probability variation short game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. On the game board 4 in the present embodiment, on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R that cover the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are arranged. These shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are provided so as to be able to move back and forth in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display area according to guide rails arranged along the upper and lower sides of the liquid crystal display device using a motor (not shown) as a drive source. At the time of driving (standby), it is housed behind the center role object 2500 and the game panel 1200 so that it is difficult to see in front view (state of FIG. 114), and at the time of driving, both shutter role objects 9000L and 9000R are liquid crystal display devices. It appears on the front surface of 1900, and the display area is covered by both shutter roles 9000L and 9000R at the maximum advance. In addition, the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R can vibrate as shown in FIG. 137 by the forward and reverse rotations of the motor at the non-driving position and the intermediate position until the maximum advance.

In the present embodiment, the notification of the result of one special lottery in the super speed mode is a normal symbol variation type effect (corresponding to the symbols stopped after the variation is started, which is performed corresponding to one special lottery. Whether or not the achievement condition of hitting if the shutter role objects 9000L and 9000R are closed and hitting unless they are closed, so to speak, closing the shutter role objects 9000L and 9000R is satisfied. Achievement-type production will be used. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the achievement-type effect using the characters such as the shutter character 9000L and 9000R is adopted, but in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a predetermined character defeats the enemy character as an achievement condition. Achievement type performance may be adopted. In short, another effect may be adopted as long as it is a winning effect if a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied.

And in the present embodiment, the achievement type effect is not performed for each variation of the special symbol that is digested at a high speed, but as a series of effects that continue during the variation of the 20 times lottery in which the super speed mode continues. I'm trying to do it. In other words, if the loser continues for 20 times, the shutter role 9000L and 9000R will be closed in the middle of the super speed mode, but the shutter role 9000L and 9000R will never be closed, and the super speed mode will not be closed. On the other hand, when the lottery is won during the lottery up to 20 times, the shutter winning components 9000L and 9000R are closed to indicate that the jackpot is a jackpot.

In this super-fast mode, a design variation effect is performed with a decorative symbol for each variation of the special symbol that is digested at the high speed, and the decorative symbol is stopped for each variation to notify the result of the lottery, which ends one lottery. However, since the player is clearly recognized by the stop of the decorative pattern and this is repeated at high speed, the advantageous game state is reduced one after another, which gives a strong sense of loss. In this point, in the present embodiment, the above-described normal symbol variation type effect is not adopted in the super-speed mode, but the achievement type effect of hitting when the shutter accessory members 9000L and 9000R are closed is adopted. It is difficult to feel the end of the lottery (division of fluctuation), and it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss in which advantageous game states are successively reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol variable type effect based on the decorative symbol is not performed, but some players may want to know the number of special lottery performed in the super speed mode. Therefore, the decoration pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a small position where the player normally does not care, such as a corner of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player cannot or cannot easily understand the decoration. It is preferable to perform a symbol variation effect of the symbol. As a result, there is room for the player who wants to know the number of times the special lottery has been performed in the super speed mode, while not giving the player a feeling of loss in which the advantageous game state is decreasing. It will be possible to leave. In the following, a player who does not care about the number of times the special symbols are drawn in the super speed mode is referred to as a "general player", and a player who wants to know the number of times the special symbols are drawn in the super speed mode is specified. Player. Further, when it is not necessary to distinguish between a general player and a specific player, they are simply referred to as "players".

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the super speed mode, by performing the above-mentioned achievement type effect as a series of effects using the variation time corresponding to a plurality of lottery (variation time of the maximum 20 times), The variation of the special symbol in the lottery for 20 times is shown as the variation production in one lottery in the production. For this reason, in the time saving game state after the jackpot game is over, if the jackpot is won in the 20 times of the lottery, the impression as if the jackpot was won in the one lottery (the first rotation) after the jackpot game is over. It is possible to give the player a feeling of a big jackpot. In particular, as in the present embodiment, in the super-speed mode, as described above, the fluctuations occur one after another in the form close to the firing interval, so that the fluctuation time corresponding to a plurality of lottery is collected into one lottery. Even if it is made as if it is such a variation effect, the time does not unnecessarily increase and it can be realized without a feeling of strangeness. In addition, when only aiming to give a feeling of a big jackpot like this, it is only necessary to be able to make the appearance number of lottery appear smaller than the actual number of lottery. Instead, it is possible to adopt a symbol variation display effect that shows the lottery result by changing and stopping the decorative symbol.

In addition, in the above example, while the super speed mode continues, the lottery for the special symbols of up to 20 times is made to appear as if it is a variable effect for one lottery, but for example, five times of lottery It is also possible to use a corresponding variation time and make it appear as if it is a variation effect for one lottery. Even in this case, it is possible to show the lottery number, which is originally up to 20 times, in a pseudo manner to four lottery numbers, and the impression that the next big hit comes immediately after the jackpot game is over. Can be given. In short, if the variation effect is performed once by using the variation time corresponding to two or more times of lottery, it is possible to artificially look like the number of lottery is less than the original number of times of lottery. As a result, it is possible to enhance the feeling of a large-scale condominium in the event of a big hit.

FIG. 139 is an example of a diagram showing the transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 139, the time saving game state is composed of a super speed mode, a normal speed mode and a slow speed mode. Then, the main control MPU4100a, 81 times, 82 times, 83 times, 84 times, 85 times, the number of times to control to the time saving game state (the number of times of special lottery) each time the jackpot game is finished and the time saving function is activated, 86 times, 87 times, 88 times, 89 times, 90 times, 91 times, 92 times, 93 times, 94 times, 95 times, 96 times, 97 times, 98 times, 99 times and 100 times Do a lot of short-time draws. In addition, in this example, the probability of being determined for any number of times is the same in this time saving lottery, but the probabilities may be biased so as to be easily determined to be a specific number of times.

Here, assuming that the number of time reductions determined by the time reduction number lottery is N (81≦N≦100), the main control MPU 4100a sets the determined number of time reductions N times to the time reduction game state (super speed mode, normal speed mode). And slow speed mode). Then, when the super speed mode ends, fluctuations in a fixed number of times such as 75 times are controlled to the normal speed mode, and fluctuations in a fixed number of times such as 5 times are controlled to a slow speed mode. Then, when the slow speed mode ends, the time saving game state ends and the non-time saving game state is controlled. In the present embodiment, when the time saving game state ends, the game state does not immediately shift to the normal game state but shifts to the normal game state through the chance state described above. In this chance state, the probability variation function operates depending on the number of times it is controlled to the time saving game state, so that the player can be expected to win the special lottery. However, in this chance state, a display effect indicating that the expectation of winning is higher than in the normal game state is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 regardless of whether the probability variation function is activated internally. Since it is performed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being immediately lost even if the time saving game state is ended, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Since the number of times of special lottery performed in the normal speed mode and the slow speed mode is constant, it is a difference between the determined time saving number N times and the number of special lottery performed in the normal speed mode and the slow speed mode ( N-80) times is determined as the number of times of special lottery performed in the super speed mode. In the super speed mode, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a series of effects that continue during the fluctuations in the (N-80) times of drawing in the super speed mode.

By the way, in the game state after the jackpot game is over, the number of times the probability variation function operates (the number of special lottery) is always a fixed number (100 times in this example), while the number of times the time saving function operates (special lottery). The number of times) is an arbitrary number that is determined each time by a lottery time lottery. Therefore, although it is difficult to know externally whether or not the probability varying function is operating, a state in which the probability varying function operates internally can occur in the chance state.

Here, the chance state will be described in detail. Among the chance states in which the special lottery is performed a fixed number of times (19 times in this example), the number of times the probability variation function has been activated (100 times in this example) and the number of times the time saving function has been activated (N About (100-N) times, which is the difference with the (time), the probability variation function continues to operate internally even after the time saving game state ends. Then, after the probability variation function has been activated 100 times after the jackpot gaming state has been completed (after the probability variation function has been activated (100-N) times after the time saving game state has been completed), the probability variation function has been deactivated and the internal Peculiar probability variation game state ends. Here, if the time saving number determined by the time saving number lottery is 81 times, the probability changing game state in which the probability changing function operates internally during the entire period of the chance state becomes the time saving time number determined by the time saving number lottery is 100. If it is the time, the probability change function does not operate internally during the entire chance state, and the probability change game state occurs. However, it is difficult to know whether the probability variation game state is internally or not even if the display effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is seen.

In this way, after the jackpot game is over, the number of times controlled in the probability variation game state (number of special lottery) is set to a fixed number, and the number of times controlled in the time-saving game state (more specifically, super speed mode) (special lottery) By making it difficult to grasp the number of times), it is possible to determine the chance state that the probability variation function operates internally, but it is difficult to grasp the operation of the probability variation function externally, and the probability variation function operates internally. Although not, it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult to grasp the operation of the probability varying function externally. That is, even though the number of times controlled to the probability variation game state is a fixed number of times, each time it is controlled to the chance state, the probability variation is made in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp in any period of the period controlled to the chance state. The function will be activated. This not only reduces the discouragement that can be given to the player by shifting to the normal game state immediately after the time saving game state ends, but also the probability change function operates in the chance state each time the chance state is controlled. Since the period may differ depending on the result of the lottery, the game in the chance state can be enjoyed. Moreover, since there is still room for grasping the approximate number of special lottery performed in the super speed mode as described above, it is possible to enjoy the game while predicting the period during which the probability variation function operates in the chance state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a indicates in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the peripheral control MPU 4140a is operating at any timing in the chance state when the probability variation function is operating internally. It is controlled so as to be disclosed through the display effect displayed as. Such disclosure is disclosed, for example, by displaying a specific character that is displayed only when the probability variation function is activated. However, the invention is not limited to the one disclosed in a mode in which it is necessarily confirmed that the probability variation function is operating internally, and may be displayed in a mode showing the possibility that the probability variation function is operating internally. ..

The disclosure that the probability variation function is operating internally means, for example, that the probability variation function is operating internally each time a special lottery is conducted, provided that the probability variation function is operating internally. The internal state disclosure lottery for determining whether or not to disclose is performed, and when it is determined to disclose, it can be performed at the timing of the display effect performed based on the determined special lottery. In the chance state of this example, the period during which the internal probability changing function continues to be kept secret, so even if it is disclosed that the probability changing function is operating, the subsequent special lottery , The probability variation function is not always performed. As a result, when it is disclosed that the probability variation function is operating internally, the player feels an expectation, but the expectation decreases as the game proceeds thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a sense of tension while feeling the expectation of a big hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It should be noted that the timing at which the fact that the probability changing function is operating is disclosed is not limited to the above, and it may be determined, for example, when shifting from the time saving game state to the specific effect state. In this case, it is preferable that the peripheral control MPU 4140a also determines the number of disclosures regarding the operating state of the internal probability variation function, and teaches the number of disclosures, for example, when the specific effect state is started. If the number of disclosures regarding the operating state of the internal probability varying function is large, it is possible to excite the player. However, the number of disclosures regarding the operating state of the probability variation function internally does not affect the easiness of winning in the special lottery or the rate of exit such as the continuation rate for the operation of the probability variation function. Even if the number of times of disclosure of the operating state of the probability variation function is small, there is an advantage that it does not immediately deteriorate the interest.

Further, instead of disclosing that the probability varying function is operating internally, whether or not the probability varying function is operating may be disclosed. That is, the case where the probability variation function is not operating may be disclosed.

Further, it is preferable to display the number of times of execution of special lottery and the number of remaining times in the time saving game state, starting from the time when the super speed mode ends. Under the predetermined condition, the number of special lottery performed in the super speed mode will be less than the specified number (100 times in this example), but the special lottery (probability change function) The special lottery under operation) is performed in the chance state as described above.

That is, the time saving game state of N times (N is any integer from 81 to 100 in this example) the number of times of which is determined by the time saving number lottery is a super speed mode in which the special lottery is performed (N-80) times, for example. And a normal speed mode in which the special lottery is performed 75 times, for example, and a slow speed mode in which the special lottery is performed 5 times, for example. Then, in such a time saving game state, the number of executions of the special lottery is displayed starting from the end of the super speed mode. In the super-fast mode, a series of achievement-type performances are performed using the time required to complete the special lottery, even though the special lottery is performed a plurality of times. As a result, it is highly possible that the player recognizes that the special lottery has been performed less than the plurality of times (for example, once). In this example, when the special lottery is performed, for example, 81 times, the time saving game state ends, and it is highly likely that it is recognized that the state advantageous for the player (probability variation game state) also ends.

However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of times N the time saving function is activated is determined by the time saving number lottery. The time saving game state of N times determined in this way is, for example, a super speed mode in which the special lottery is determined by the super speed mode number determination lottery and performed (N-80) times (where N is 81 to 100 in this example). Any of the integers), the normal speed mode in which the special lottery is performed 75 times, and the slow speed mode in which the special lottery is performed 5 times, for example. However, as described above, the player recognizes that the remaining number of times that the player is in an advantageous state (a state in which it is possible to know that the probability variation function is operating externally) from the end of the super speed mode is 80 times. You will be playing a game. Therefore, although the remaining number of times of special lottery executed in an advantageous state for the player is recognized as 80 times from the end of the super speed mode as the starting point, the game proceeds, but internally Even after the time saving game state ends, the probability variation function can continue to operate. The special lottery (special lottery with the probability variation function activated) for (100-N) times, which is the difference between the number of times the probability variation function operates (100 times in this example) and the number N of times the time saving function operates, This is because it is performed in the chance state as described above.

In the super-speed mode, a series of effects that continue throughout the fluctuations in the lottery are displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know how many times the special lottery has been executed in this series of effects. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if the above-mentioned series of effects were performed during the lottery changes less than the specified number of times due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the player grasps it. Is difficult to do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the normal speed mode ends, the special lottery becomes a slow speed mode in which the special lottery is performed, for example, five times, but it goes without saying that the slow speed mode is not an essential configuration.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1200 Gaming panel 1900 Liquid crystal display 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3040 Panel relay board 3041 Lamp drive board 3045 Motor drive board 4010 Peripheral control board (Direction control means)
4140 Peripheral control unit (production control means)

Claims (1)

A gate member which is provided in a predetermined game area and through which a game ball can pass, and a starting opening through which the game ball can be switched between an easy state and a difficult state by operating a movable member,
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening,
A production means for performing a predetermined production,
An accessory structure that can move from the standby position to the performance position,
Production control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game with the predetermined production by the production means based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
Jackpot game execution means capable of executing jackpot game based on the lottery result,
After the jackpot game is executed, advantageous game state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
External advantageous state notification means for controlling to an external advantageous state so that the player can understand that the advantageous game state is being controlled during the advantageous game state,
In the advantageous game state, movable control means capable of executing control of the movable member so that the game ball can easily win the start opening based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member,
Equipped with
The execution time of the variation display game performed by the effect control means is determined from a variation pattern table that is referenced according to the lottery result,
The variation pattern table is configured so that it can be changed depending on the number of variations after the control of the advantageous game state is started, and is predetermined after being controlled to the advantageous game state so that the lottery can be exhausted at high speed. The high-speed fluctuation pattern table is set to be referred to up to a specified number of times, and a high-speed lottery digestion means capable of executing the derivation of the lottery result at high speed by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table set up to the specified number of times. Have,
The passing speed variation pattern table in which the derivation of the lottery result is set relatively longer than when the high speed variation pattern table is referenced in the advantageous gaming state after the high speed variation pattern table is referenced the specified number of times. The change pattern table is changed so that
After the advantageous game state advantageous to the player is finished, the variation pattern table is controlled to the normal game state and referred to in the advantageous game state immediately before being controlled to the normal game state. In the variation pattern table that can be referred to when the lottery result by the lottery means is a lottery result in which the jackpot game is not executed in the gaming state, a specific variation that tends to take the longest time to derive the lottery result The pattern table is referenced,
While the lottery is quickly digested by the high-speed lottery digestion means, it has a number-of-times production means capable of executing a series of display productions over a period in which a plurality of lottery is digested,
The external advantageous state indicated by the external advantageous state informing means, after the high-speed lottery by the high-speed lottery extinguishing means is finished, it ends with a predetermined number of times the lottery has been digested,
During the derivation of the lottery result performed by the high-speed lottery digestion means, the accessory structure is operable, and when the jackpot game is executed, the accessory structure is moved to the effect position. By notifying the player that the jackpot game will be executed by doing so, and when the jackpot game is not executed, the accessory structure does not operate from the standby position to the effect position. , It is possible to execute an effect that is expected to be informed that it is the lottery result that the jackpot game is executed by the accessory structure ,
When the accessory structure is moved to the effect position in order to notify the player that the jackpot game is to be executed, the high speed variation pattern table is referred to, and a combination of decorative symbols is specified in parallel. A gaming machine characterized by not performing a symbol variation effect that is a combination or an effect .